TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
STARTING AND DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
VEHICLE CARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
1
2
3
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ⅵ Warnings, Cautions And Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual includes instructions for standard and op-
tional equipment available at the time this manual was
printed. The manufacturer reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications and to make addi-
tions or improvements in its product without imposing
any obligations upon itself to install them on previously
manufactured products.
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
When it comes to service, remember that your manufac-
turers dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-
trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and is
interested in your satisfaction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. Notes
are provided as helpful information.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the driver’s front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This
number also appears on the vehicle registration or title.
1
WARNING!
This product contains or emits chemicals known to
the State of California to cause birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
Overview - Instruments and controls
3. Supplemental restraint system-air bag
(For driver’s seat) → p. 87
Horn switch → p. 130
4. Hazard warning flasher switch → p. 121
5. Windshield wiper and washer switch → p. 124
6. Vents → p. 231
7. Supplemental restraint system-air bag
(For front passenger’s seat) → p. 87
8. Audio
9. Rear window defroster switch → p. 123
10. Air conditioning → p. 232
11. Fog light switch → p. 121
12. Hood release lever → p. 41
13. Instrument panel light dimmer control → p. 122
14. Combination headlight, dimmer and turn-signal
lever → p. 117
15. Cruise control lever → p. 111
16. Accessory socket → p. 207
17. Parking brake lever → p. 165
18. Gearshift or selector lever → p. 149, 154
1. Instrument cluster → p. 104
2. Ignition switch → p. 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
7
Interior
2. Remote trunk lid release → p. 36
3. Power window switch → p. 43
4. Window lock switch → p. 44
1
5. Electric remote-controlled outside mirror
switch → p. 184
6. Power door lock switch → p. 34
7. Sun visor → p. 205
8. Sunroof switch (for vehicles with sunroof) → p. 45
Dome light (for vehicles without sunroof) → p. 127
9. Inside day/ night rearview mirror → p. 173
Electrochromic inside rearview mirror (if so equipped)
→ p. 174
Dome light (for vehicles with sunroof)
10. Vanity mirror → p. 206
11. Glove compartment → p. 210
12. Cup holder (for rear seat) → p. 208
13. Rear seat → p. 64
14. Center console with lid → p. 211
15. Supplemental restraint system-side air bag → p. 87
(for front seats, if so equipped)
16. Cup holder (for front seats) → p. 208
17. Front seat
1. Seat belt → p. 66
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (for front
seats) → p. 71
18. Ash receptacle receiver.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
INTRODUCTION
Outside
2. Windshield wiper and washer → p. 124
3. Sunroof (if so equipped) → p. 45
4. Outside rear-view mirrors → p. 184
5. Whip antenna → p. 215
6. Headlights → p. 117, 288, 289
7. Front turn signal lights and parking lights
→ p. 117, 291
8. Fog lights → p. 118
9. Front side marker lights → p. 292
10. Tire inflation pressure → p. 326
Changing tires → p. 264
Tire rotation → p. 330
Tire chains → p. 331
Wheel covers (if so equipped) → p. 262
11. Locking and unlocking → p. 26
Keyless entry system → p. 29
12. Stop and tail lights → p. 287
13. High-mounted stop lights → p. 296
14. Trunk lid → p. 35
15. License plate lights → p. 296
16. Back up lights → p. 287
17. Rear turn signal lights →p. 287
18. Rear side-marker lights → p. 287
19. Fuel filler → p. 39
1. Engine compartment → p. 253
Engine hood → p. 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
9
Trunk Area
1. Inside emergency trunk release handle → p. 37
2. Trunk light → p. 297
3. Jack → p. 261
1
4. Spare tire → p. 261
5. Tools → p. 260
E19A0720
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 INTRODUCTION
QUICK INDEX
If this warning light comes on…
NOTE: These warning lights will illuminate for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition key is first turned on.
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
·Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.
Test the system as described on page 111.
·If the light does not go out after the test, or if it illumi-
nates again, have your vehicle inspected at an autho-
rized dealer.
P. 111
·When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is
not functioning and only the ordinary braking system is
functioning.
Anti-lock braking system
·If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the
parking brake is fully released.
·If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake,
stop and check the brake fluid level is correct.
·If the brake fluid level is correct, call an authorized
dealer for assistance.
P. 115
P. 112
Brake warning light
·If this light comes on while driving, park your vehicle in
a safe place and stop the engine immediately.
Call an authorized dealer for assistance.
Oil pressure warning light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION 11
If this warning light comes on…
1
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
P. 112
·Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.
Check the alternator belt.
If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains
on when the ignition key is turned back on, call an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Charging system warning light
·Park the vehicle in a safe place.
Idle the engine until the warning light goes off. If the
light does not go off, have your vehicle inspected at an
authorized dealer.
P. 157
“N” indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes rapidly
(twice per second)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 INTRODUCTION
If this warning light comes on…
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
P. 157
·Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
“N” indicator light in the
instruemnt cluster flashes slowly
(once per second)
·Your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, have the engine system checked at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
If the vehicle is not drivable, contact Emergency
Roadside Service (ERS), authorized dealer, or local
towing company for assistance.
P. 113
Malfunction indicator light
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”)
S RS
·Have the air bag system checked at an authorized dealer.
P. 114
P. 116
Air bag warning light
·
It is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately but we
recommend that you have the system checked at an
authorized dealer as soon as possilble.
Traction control system warning light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION 13
If you hear the sound…
1
N50B001D
Sound
Do this
Ref. page
P. 27, 146
“Key reminder chime”
A chime will sound if the driver’s door is opened while
the ignition key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
Remove the key to stop the chime.
If you hear a chime constantly when OR
the driver’s door is opened. “Headlight reminder chime”
P. 118
A chime will sound if the driver’s door is opened when
the ignition key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or
removed from the ignition switch with the lights on.
If the driver’s door is closed, the chime will stop
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 INTRODUCTION
If you hear the sound…
Sound
Do this
Ref. page
P. 168
If you hear a metallic sound (squeal)
when you depress the brake pedal
while driving.
“Brake pad wear alarm”
The brake pads have worn down near the serviceable
limit.
Have the brake pads replaced at an authorized dealer.
If you hear a chime from the engine
compartment continuously while the
engine is on.
“Brake system (hydraulic brake booster) warning chime P. 115
(Vehicle with anti-lock braking system)”
The brake circuit may not be operating correctly.
If this chime does not stop after a few minutes, carefully
stop the vehicle in a safe location and contact your nearest
authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION 15
If you hear the sound…
1
Sound
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
P. 116
If you hear a
chime while the
engine is on, see
the warning
light in the
instrument
cluster.
“Seat belt reminder/warning chime”
If the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened 1 minute later, the
chime will sound intermittently (12 times). If the driver’s seat belt
remains unfastened while the vehicle is being driven, the chime
will sound as a warning each time the vehicle stops and starts.
“Low-fuel warning chime ”
P. 40, 111
P. 117
Fuel is low. Add fuel as soon as possible.
“Washer fluid level chime”
The windshield washer level is low. Add fluid.
“Door-ajar warning chime”
P. 27, 110
P. 36
Door or trunk is not properly shut.
If you shut the door or trunk, the chime will stop.
“Trunk-ajar warning chime”
Trunk is not properly shut.
If you shut the trunk, the chime will stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 INTRODUCTION
If this problem occurs…
Problem
Do this
Ref. Page
P. 147
Cannot turn the key
(1)“LOCK” to “ACC”
Turn the key while slightly turning the steering wheel
right and left.
(2)”ACC” to “LOCK”
Vehicle with automatic transaxle
Check the position of gear selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the gear selector
lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
Vehicle with manual transaxle
Place the key at the ‘‘ACC’’ position. Push the key in
and turn it.
Cannot shift the gear selector lever
from the “P” (PARK) position
Shift the gear selector lever while depressing the brake
pedal. Check if the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
P. 150, 155
P. 240
The windows are fogged up.
1.Set the heater/ air conditioning mode selection dial to
the “
” or “
” position.
2.Turn on the blower.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION 17
If this problem occurs…
1
Problem
Do this
Ref. page
P. 273
The engine does not start.
The lights do not come on or dim.
The horn does not honk or weak sound.
The battery may have a weak charge.
The engine coolant temperature gauge The engine is overheated.
P. 272
indicator enters the “H” (hot) position. Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine
compartment.
If necessary call for roadside assistance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 INTRODUCTION
If this problem occurs…
Problem
Do this
Ref. page
P. 257
The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or
snow.
1. Carefully rock the vehicle by shifting the transmission
from low to reverse.
WARNING
1.When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck
position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The
rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly lurch
forward or backward, and injure bystanders.
2.Avoid racing the engine or spinning the wheels.
Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in
overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking
attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.
The brakes are not functioning
properly after crossing a puddle or
stream.
Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly
depressing the brake pedal.
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION 19
If this problem occurs…
1
Problem
Do this
Ref. page
The automatic transaxle does not shift There may be a problem in the automatic transaxle.
P. 154, 162
when accelerating and/ or the vehicle
does not easily begin to move.
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer.
1.Vehicles with automatic transaxle
Shift the lever into “2” (SECOND) position when
starting the vehicle. If the vehicle is on a level road, shift
the lever back to “D” (DRIVE) position.
2.Vehicles with Autostick automatic transaxle
Shift the lever into 2nd gear of the Autostick mode
when starting the vehicle. If the vehicle is on a level
road, shift the lever back to “D” (DRIVE) position.
(These methods may or may not work depending on the
contents of malfunction.)
A tire is punctured.
1.Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat P. 264
and level.
2.Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
2
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ⅵ Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ⅵ Door locks (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ To lock the door without using the key . . . . . . .26
Ⅵ Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Locking and unlocking with the door lock
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Locking and unlocking with key or inside lock
knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ To lock the door with the key
(Driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Locking by means of the inside lock knob . . . . .35
Ⅵ Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Remote trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Inside emergency trunk release . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Ⅵ Fuel filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Ⅵ Engine hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Ⅵ Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Driver switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ To lock the door from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Ⅵ Keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Confirmation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Using the panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Procedure for replacing keyless transmitter
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
▫ Passenger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Ⅵ Sunroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ To tilt up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ To tilt down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ To open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ To close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Ⅵ Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Alarm stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Testing the theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 23
KEYS
NOTE: The key number (A) is stamped on the plate as
shown in the illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store the key and
key number plate in a separate place so that you can
order a key from your authorized dealer if the original
keys are lost.
2
SENTRY KEY
The sentry key is designed to significantly reduce the
possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is
to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted.
A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to
certain conditions), using a key ЉregisteredЉ to the sentry
key system.
F11A0920
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Two keys are provided.
The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare
key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
In case like these, the theft-alarm indicator (located in
the instrument cluster) will blink after 10 seconds. The
theft-alarm indicator will flash for approximately 30
seconds and then go off.
Remove the above object from the key and turn the
key back to the ЉACCЉ or ЉLOCKЉ position. Then try
again to start the engine. If the engine does not start,
consult an authorized dealer.
2. Since there is a transponder built into the key, be
careful not to cause shock to the key, such as by dropping
it or by putting heavy objects on top of it.
F30A0210
3. Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to heat
caused by the high temperature and high humidity.
NOTE
1. In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to
receive the registered ID code from the key. This
means the engine will not start even when the regis-
tered key is turned to the ЉSTARTЉ position:
4. Sentry key is not compatible with remote starting
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security protection.
5. A system failure is suspected when the ignition key is
turned to the ЉSTARTЉ position, the engine does not start.
In such a case, consult an authorized dealer.
•
When the key comes into contact with a metallic or
magnetic object.
•
When the key comes into contact with another
immobilizing key, or with some other transponder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 25
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
CAUTION!
Do not make any alterations or additions to the
sentry key system. Any alterations or additions
could cause failure of the sentry key.
2
NOTE
:
A valid key is one that will start and run the vehicle.
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
ignition to the ЉONЉ position for 5 seconds.
Replacement keys
NOTE
:
2. Turn the ignition to the ЉOFFЉ position and remove the
first key.
Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start the vehicle.
3. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition in
the ЉONЉ position within 7 seconds.
Theft-alarm indicator will blink twice.
Turn the ignition to the ЉOFFЉ position and remove the
second key.
If you lose the key, you can order a key from your
authorized dealer by referring to the key number.
You will also need to register the key ID code.
Your dealer can register the key ID’s or you can follow
the ЉCustomer Key ProgrammingЉ procedure.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
the ignition in the ЉONЉ position within 7 seconds.
The theft-alarm indicator will illuminate for about 3
seconds when the registration is completed.
You are provided with 2 keys, but you may add up to 6
more keys, for a total of 8 registered to the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
If an error occurs, the indicator will flash 3 times.
DOOR LOCKS (MANUAL)
5. Repeat step 4 if you want to register additional keys.
Be sure to complete the entire registration process within
30 seconds after the theft-alarm indicator flashes in step
3.
To lock the door without using the key
General Information
Your sentry key operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. This
device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
F12A2370
To lock the door, set the inside lock knob to the locked
position, and close the door.
Be sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing
the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 27
Key reminder chime
To lock the door with the key (Driver’s side only)
After the ignition switch is off, if the driver’s door is
opened while the ignition key is in the ignition, a chime
will sound to remind you to remove the key.
2
Forgotten-key prevention mechanism
If the inside lock knobs on the doors are set to the locked
position and the driver’s door or passenger’s door is
closed while the key is still in the ignition switch, the lock
will automatically be released.
Lock
Unlock
Door-ajar warning chime
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/ h)
and the door or the trunk is open, a chime will sound to
inform the driver that the door is not properly shut.
F12A2330
Rotate the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the
door. After checking that the door is locked, turn the key
back to the center and remove it from the lock cylinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
To lock the door from the inside
CAUTION!
•
•
Make sure the doors are closed; driving with
doors not completely closed is very dangerous.
Never leave a child in the vehicle unattended.
F12A1720
Move the inside lock knob to the locked position (so that
the red mark cannot be seen) to lock the door. All doors
should be kept locked while driving.
The locked front driver’s side door can be opened by
pulling its inside door handle without unlocking the
inside lock knob. This feature is applicable to the driver’s
door only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 29
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
To unlock the doors
Pressing the UNLOCK button once will unlock the
driver’s door only. Press the UNLOCK button one more
time, and all doors will be unlocked.
When the driver’s door only, or all doors are unlocked
with the reading light in the “OFF” position, the reading
light will illuminate for 30 seconds.
LOCK
button
2
UNLOCK
button
All turn signal lights will also blink once.
To unlock the trunk lid
Press the TRUNK button twice within five seconds and
the trunk lid will be unlocked. The trunk lid must be
closed manually after it has been unlocked.
TRUNK
button
F12D0350T
Confirmation function
The confirmation functions provided by the horn and
turn signal lights after operation of the keyless entry
system can each be turned ON or OFF as desired. The
following procedures must be performed with the key
removed from the ignition switch. At the end of each
procedure, a chime sounds once if the function has been
turned ON or twice if the function has been turned OFF.
Press the keyless transmitter button(s), and all doors will
be locked or unlocked as desired. The PANIC button can
also help you signal for attention.
To lock the doors
Press the LOCK button, and all doors will be locked.
When they are locked with the reading light in the “OFF”
position, the reading light blinks twice. All turn signal
lights also blink twice and the horn sounds once.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Horn deactivation/reactivation
The confirmation function can be set in the following
three ways.
2. Release the LOCK and UNLOCK switches at the same
time.
Turn signal light feature–ON/OFF
Each time the confirmation function is set, a buzzer will
sound to tell you the condition of the confirmation
function.
The confirmation function provided by the turn signal
lights when the doors are locked and the confirmation
function provided when they are unlocked can be
deactivated/ reactivated separately.
One buzzer: The horn will sound if the doors are locked
with the keyless entry system. The horn will sound
regardless of whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
At the end of each procedure, a buzzer sounds once if the
function has been reactivated or twice if the function has
been deactivated.
Two buzzers: The horn will not sound, even if the doors
are locked with the keyless entry system.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
press the LOCK button within this period.
Three buzzers: The horn will sound if the doors are
already locked and the keyless entry system is used
again.
2. To turn ON/ OFF the function provided when the
doors are locked, release the LOCK button and then
release the UNLOCK button.
In this mode, the horn will only sound when the keyless
entry LOCK switch is pressed again to reconfirm that the
doors are locked.
3. To turn ON/ OFF the function provided when the
doors are unlocked, release the UNLOCK button and
then release the LOCK button.
1. Press the LOCK switch (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and
press the UNLOCK switch (2) during this period.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 31
NOTE
1. The keyless entry system will not operate if the key is
in the ignition switch.
2
2. The keyless transmitter will operate within about 12 m
(39 ft) from the vehicle. However, the operating range
may change if the vehicle is located near a TV transmit-
ting tower, power station, or radio broadcasting station.
PANIC
switch
3. If the UNLOCK button is pressed when all doors are
closed and no door is opened within approximately 30
seconds, re-locking will automatically occur.
4. If the following conditions are observed after pressing
a keyless transmitter button, the battery in the keyless
transmitter may need to be replaced.
F12D0360
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may
activate the alarm to call attention.
•
•
•
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid cannot be unlocked.
The panic alarm cannot be operated.
1. Press the PANIC button.
5. Do not leave the keyless transmitter where it may be
exposed to heat caused by the direct rays of the sun.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will
sound intermittently for about 3 minutes.
6. If your transmitter is lost or damaged, please contact
an authorized dealer for a replacement.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the keyless
transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
7. If you wish to add another transmitter, contact an
authorized dealer. A maximum of 4 keyless transmitters
may be programmed for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the manufacturer for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
Procedure for replacing keyless transmitter
battery
The keyless transmitter is a precision electronic
device. Therefore;
•
•
•
Avoid impact to the transmitter.
Keep the transmitter dry.
Do not disassemble the transmitter.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
F12D0390T
1. Remove the transmitter case mounting screw (A) and
gently pry open the case.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 33
NOTE
1. You may purchase a battery at any local store that sells
batteries.
+side
2
2
2. Your authorized dealer can replace the battery for you
if necessary.
CAUTION!
-side
When the transmitter is opened, be careful to keep
water, dust, etc. out. In addition, do not touch the
internal components.
F12D0280
2. Remove the discharged battery from the panic button
side of the case half.
3. Install a new battery with its positive + side (2) down.
Coin type battery CR2032 used
4. Close the transmitter case firmly and tighten the
mounting screw.
5. Check the keyless entry system for operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Rolling lock feature
If the vehicle’s speed goes over 15 mph (25 km/ h), all the
doors will lock automatically.
Locking and unlocking with the door lock switch
Driver side switch
Passenger side switch
NOTE: The Rolling lock function can be turned ON or
OFF by the following procedures:
1. Insert the key in the ignition. Leave key in “OFF”
position.
Lock
Lock
Unlock
Unlock
2. Close both the driver’s and passenger’s doors.
3. Press and hold the driver’s (central) door lock switch
until a chime sounds (10 seconds). The Rolling lock
feature will be switched to ON (if it is OFF) or OFF (if it
is ON).
If the chime sounds once, the Rolling lock feature is ON.
If the chime sounds twice, the Rolling lock feature is OFF.
F12B0850
All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by pressing
the power door lock switch on the driver’s or the
passenger’s door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 35
Locking and unlocking with key or inside lock
knob
Locking by means of the inside lock knob
Place the inside lock knob of the driver’s door in the
locked position, and both doors will be locked.
2
TRUNK LID
Lock
Unlock
Lock
WARNING!
•
•
It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open
since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can enter the
cabin. CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. If
trapped in the trunk, it is possible to escape from
the trunk by using the inside emergency trunk
release handle. (See ‘‘Inside emergency trunk re-
lease’’ on Page 37).
F12B0710
Using the key to lock or unlock the driver’s door will
automatically lock or unlock all of the doors.
•
Turn the key inserted in the driver’s door lock once in
the unlocking direction, and the front driver’s door
will be unlocked.
•
Give another turn in the unlocking direction, and both
doors will be unlocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
CAUTION!
Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading
and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could
lead to burns.
To open the trunk lid
Press the TRUNK switch twice within five seconds.
(Refer to ‘‘Keyless entry system’’ on page 29.)
The trunk lid will unlock and rise slightly.
Lift it to open.
F15A1770
To close the trunk lid
Lower the trunk lid and push down with both hands
until it is locked.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the trunk lid release lever while the
vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid opened, luggage
could fall onto the road and cause an accident.
Trunk-ajar warning chime
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/ h)
and the trunk lid is open, a chime will sound to inform
the driver that the trunk lid is not properly shut.
Remote trunk lid release
Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the left of the
driver’s seat, up to open the trunk lid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 37
Inside emergency trunk release
The handle glows in the dark after exposure to sunlight.
You and your family should familiarize yourselves with the
location and operation of the emergency trunk release
handle. Children should be taught not to play in or around
vehicles.
2
WARNING!
•
•
•
Children should never be left unsupervised in or
around vehicles.
Unsupervised children could lock themselves in
an open vehicle or trunk.
F15A2350
People trapped inside a vehicle, or trunk, even if
only for a short period of time, can quickly die
from suffocation or heat stroke, especially on hot
days. Interior temperatures in vehicles can rise in
minutes.
The emergency trunk release is designed to provide a way to
open the trunk lid from inside the trunk. It was developed to
help prevent death and serious heat-related injuries, includ-
ing brain damage, especially for children who might become
locked inside a vehicle trunk.
The illuminated ЉTЉ shaped yellow emergency trunk release
handle (see illustration) is mounted near the latch inside the
trunk lid. Velcro keeps the handle secure in its holder.
•
Keep your vehicle doors locked and the trunk
closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys
away from children.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
CAUTION!
•
•
When loading objects in the trunk, position them
so that they will not contact the emergency trunk
release handle when closing the trunk. This will
prevent damage to the handle that could render it
inoperable.
Handle
1. Tear off
2. Pull
Always keep the handle in its holder when oper-
ating the vehicle to prevent trunk cargo from
moving the handle that might result in the open-
ing of the trunk lid.
Holder
F15A2180
To open the trunk from inside the trunk, tear off the
illuminated ЉTЉ handle from its holder by pulling in the
direction of the arrow (1). Then pull the handle in the
direction of the arrow (2). Push up on the trunk to exit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 39
FUEL FILLER
The fuel filler is located on the right rear of the body.
Hook a finger behind the fuel filler door, and pull the
door toward you.
2
Close
Remove
C20A1160
WARNING!
C20A1140
Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly by turning it
counterclockwise.
To close, securely turn the fuel tank filler tube cap
clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, and gently
push the fuel filler tank door into the closed position.
Turn off the engine while refueling.
Do not smoke and do not operate other ignition
sources while refueling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Low fuel warning chime
If a chime sounds when the low fuel warning light is on,
that means the fuel is low.
NOTE: If the fuel tank filler tube cap is not tight while
driving, the “Malfunction indicator light (SERVICE EN-
GINE SOON)” may illuminate when the onboard diag-
nostic (OBD) system performs its self check.
Always tighten the fuel tank filler tube cap until you hear
clicking sounds. The indicator light will go off after
driving several times. If the indicator light does not go
off, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: If the low fuel warning light goes off, then comes
back on again, the chime will not sound.
Fuel tank capacity
61.7 L (16.3 gal)
CAUTION!
•
As the fuel system may be under pressure, remove the
fuel tank filler tube cap slowly. Removing the cap
slowly relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have
built up in the fuel tank. If the cap is venting vapor or
if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before
completely removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
•
•
If you need to replace the fuel tank filler tube cap,
use only a cap specified for your model vehicle.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top-off”
the fuel tank again and again after filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 41
ENGINE HOOD RELEASE
WARNING!
•
•
Never release the engine hood using the release
lever while the vehicle is in motion.
2
Do not operate the vehicle unless the engine hood
is latched.
F13A1480
The engine hood release lever (located under the instru-
ment panel near the driver’s door) is used to unlock the
engine hood.
Pull the lever toward you to release the engine hood
latch.
F13A1740
Release the safety lever and lift the engine hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
NOTE: Only open the engine hood when the wipers are
at their parked position to prevent damage to the engine
hood and wipers.
F13A1720
To close, unlatch the hood prop from the engine hood
and place the hood prop in its retainer. Slowly lower
the engine hood to about 12 inches (30 cm) from the
closed position, then release it. The hood should latch
from its own weight.
F13A1710
Support the engine hood with the hood prop by
inserting the hood prop securely in the opening in the
hood marked with an arrow.
NOTE: If this does not latch the engine hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 43
or closed for a 30-second period even after the ignition
switch is turned off. However, once the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened, the windows can-
not be operated until the ignition switch is turned on
again.
CAUTION!
Be careful that hands or fingers are not trapped
when closing the engine hood.
2
POWER WINDOWS
2. Never try to operate the driver switch and passenger
switch in opposing directions at the same time. Doing so
will cause the window to freeze in position.
3. Repeated operation with the engine stopped (key
“ON”) will run down the battery. Operate the window
switches while the engine is running.
Open
Close
WARNING!
•
Before operating the power windows, make sure
that nothing can be trapped (head, hand, finger,
etc.) in the window.
F17A0250
•
•
Never leave the vehicle without removing the key.
Never leave a child in the vehicle alone.
NOTE
1. The windows can be operated when the ignition key is
in the “ON ”position. The door windows can be opened
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Driver switch
2. Passenger’s door window switch
3. Window lock switch
(When this switch is pressed into lock mode, the passen-
ger switch cannot be used to open or close the door
window, and the driver switch can open or close either
window. To unlock, press the window lock switch again.)
WARNING!
Before driving with a child in the vehicle, be sure to
press the window lock switch to make the window
switches inoperative. A child may tamper with the
switch at the risk of their hands or head becoming
trapped by the window.
F17A1600
The main driver switch can be used to operate both door
windows.
Windows will move while the switch is being operated
and stop when the switch is released.
1. Driver’s door window switch
(To fully open the driver’s door window, it is not neces-
sary to hold the switch down for the entire time the
window is being lowered.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 45
Passenger switch
SUNROOF (IF SO EQUIPPED)
2
F17A1610
F19A0960
The passenger switch can be used to operate the passen-
ger door window.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with the ignition
key in the “ON” position.
To tilt up
When the sunroof switch (1) is pressed, the back of the
sunroof automatically goes up for inside ventilation.
To stop the sunroof partway, push the sunroof switch (2).
NOTE: Before tilting the sunroof, completely open the
sunshade. Otherwise you will not have good ventilation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
To tilt down
NOTE
Press the sunroof switch (2).
To stop the sunroof partway, release the sunroof switch.
1. The sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is
in the “ON” position. The sunroof can be opened or
closed for a 30-second period after the ignition switch is
turned off. However, once the driver’s door or the
passenger’s door is opened, the sunroof cannot be oper-
ated until the ignition switch is turned on again.
To open
When the sunroof switch (1) is pressed, the back of the
sunroof automatically goes up.
When the sunroof switch (1) is pressed a second time, the
sunroof automatically opens completely.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the sunroof switch (2).
2. If the battery cable is disconnected or the fuse is
replaced while the sunroof is open, the sunroof will not
close normally even after reconnecting the battery cable.
In this case, use the following steps.
Press the switch (2) repeatedly to close the sunroof
completely. The sunroof will resume its normal operation
after this procedure is completed.
To close
The sunroof closes while the sunroof switch (2) is being
pressed.
To stop the sunroof partway, release the switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 47
Sunshade
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to close the sunshade when the
sunroof is opened.
2
WARNING!
•
•
•
When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to
close the sunroof and remove the ignition key.
Before operating the sunroof, make sure that
nothing can be trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
Never leave a child (or other person who is
incapable of safely operating the sunroof switch)
in the vehicle alone.
F19A0770
The sunshade can be opened or closed manually while
the sunroof is closed.
NOTE
NOTE: The sunshade will operate together with the
1. Do not stick your head, hand or anything else out of
the sunroof opening.
sunroof only when the sunroof is opened.
2. After washing the vehicle or after there is rain, be sure
to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
3. Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is frozen closed
(after snowfall or during extreme cold).
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the system as
described below.
4. Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the sunroof or
roof opening edge.
Arm the system and leave.
5. Do not apply any force that may cause damage to the
sunroof.
6. When waxing your vehicle, be careful not to put any
wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber) around the sun-
roof opening. If stained with wax, the weatherstrip
cannot maintain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
7. Release the switch when the sunroof has reached a
completely open or completely closed position.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
F30A0010
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Make sure the trunk lid is locked.
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide protection
from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is
operated in three stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the
second is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “disarmed”
stage. If triggered, the system provides both audible and
visual alarm signals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 49
3. Lock the driver’s and the passenger’s door by using
the key, power door lock switch, or the remote keyless
transmitter.
NOTE
1. The system will be armed even if the trunk lid is
opened, but when the system is set, be sure that the trunk
lid is latched.
2
2. The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm
indicator is illuminated, the driver’s door, the passenger’s
door is unlocked by using the key or keyless transmitter.
3. The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm
indicator is illuminated, the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” or “ACC”.
4. The system will not be armed if a door is not com-
pletely closed. If this happens, rearm the system as
described above.
5. The trunk lid can only be unlocked by using the key or
the remote keyless transmitter without triggering or
disarming the system even after the system has been
armed. When it is locked, the system will be rearmed.
F30A0210
After completion of the steps above, the theft-alarm
indicator (located in the instrument cluster) will illumi-
nate for approximately 20 seconds and then go out,
indicating that the system is armed.
6. The system will be armed even if the trunk lid is open,
but when the system is set, be sure that the trunk lid is
latched.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
7. The driver should not arm the system until first
confirming that all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
driver arms the system while a passenger(s) in the
vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the passen-
ger(s) leave the vehicle.
Horn sounds!
Headlights blink on and off!
Alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the following occur
while the vehicle is parked and the system is armed.
1. The driver’s or passenger’s door is opened without
using the key or the remote keyless transmitter.
2. The trunk lid is opened without using the key or the
remote keyless transmitter.
F30A0020
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 minutes. After 3
minutes the headlights automatically shut off.
TYPE OF ALARM
When the alarm is activated:
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3 minutes.
NOTE: The alarm will continue to operate for 3 minutes.
At the end of that period, the alarm will automatically
shut off to save battery power. The system will then be
rearmed until the proper disarming step is taken.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING 51
Alarm deactivation
The alarm can be deactivated in the following ways.
Disarmed stage
Disarm....by key (or by keyless transmitter)
1. By turning the key (in the driver’s, passenger’s door or
the trunk lid) in either direction (toward lock or unlock).
2
2. By using the remote keyless transmitter to lock or
unlock the door or trunk lid.
F30A0040T
The system will be disarmed when either of the following
steps are taken:
1. The front driver’s door, passenger’s door or the trunk
lid is unlocked by using the key or the remote keyless
transmitter.
2. The ignition key is turned to the “ACC” or “ON ”
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
3. If the UNLOCK switch is pressed when all doors are
closed and no door is opened within approximately 30
seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking the front driver’s
door, passenger’s door or the trunk lid by using the key
or the remote keyless transmitter.
NOTE: Once the system has been disarmed, it cannot be
rearmed except by repeating the arming procedure.
NOTE: To make sure the alarm sounds when the trunk
lid is opened, open the trunk lid by using the trunk lid
release lever.
Testing the theft-alarm system
Use the following procedure to test the system:
1. Lower the driver’s window.
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed stage”.
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator illuminates
and goes off in approximately 20 seconds.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the driver’s side
door by using the inside door lock knob and opening the
door.
5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds intermittently
and the headlights blink on and off when the door is
opened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
CONTENTS
3
Ⅵ Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ To adjust seat forward or backward . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ To recline the seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ To adjust seat height (Driver’s side only) . . . . . .61
▫ Adjustment of the head restraints . . . . . . . . . . .65
Ⅵ Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ UNIBELT restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ UNIBELT instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ To adjust lumbar support
▫ Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor
(Driver’s side only, if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .63
(front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ For access to the rear seat
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(passenger side entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
(BeltAlert™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Ⅵ Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Rear seat capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Fold down rear seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Ⅵ Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Seat belt extender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Ⅵ Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Installing a child restraint system to a UNIBELT
at the rear seat positions or the front passenger
seat (With emergency/ automatic locking
mechanism) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
▫ Tether anchors for the child restraint system . . . .83
▫ Tether strap anchor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Ⅵ Maintenance and inspection of seat belts . . . . . .86
Ⅵ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag . .87
▫ SRS servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Children who have outgrown child restraint
systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 55
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features that help
protect you and your passengers in an accident.
Seat belts are the most important safety device. When
worn properly, seat belts can reduce the chance of serious
injury or death in various types of crashes. For added
protection during a severe frontal collision, your vehicle
has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with air bags
for the driver and front seat passenger. The seats, head
restraints, and door locks also are safety equipment,
which must be used correctly.
No safety equipment can prevent all injuries or deaths
that can occur in severe collisions, but by making sure all
your passengers follow the instructions in this manual,
you can help reduce the risk of injury.
FRONT SEATS
3
Always check the following before you drive:
1. Everyone in the vehicle is properly wearing their seat
belt.
2. Infants and small children are properly secured in
appropriate child restraints in the rear seat.
3. All doors are closed and locked.
G21A0680
4. Seat backs are fully upright, with head restraints
properly adjusted.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible to a
position that enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily
control the steering wheel, safely operate the vehicle and
also gives you a clear frontal view.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
WARNING!
WARNING!
•
•
•
Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving.
This can be dangerous.
•
•
In order to reduce risk of serious or fatal injury in
a collision, including from a deploying front pas-
senger air bag, all front seat passengers should
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible, all children 12 years old and under
should ride restrained in the rear seat, and all
children in rear-facing child restraints must ride
in the rear seat.
After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
securely locked into position.
Be sure to have the seat adjusted by an adult. If it
is adjusted by a child, the seat may not be prop-
erly locked into position.
In order to reduce risk of serious or fatal injury in
an accident, including from a deploying driver’s
side air bag, the driver should move the driver’s
seat as far back as possible, while still maintain-
ing good visibility and good control of the steer-
ing wheel, accelerator and brake pedals.
NOTE: On vehicles with a power seat, to prevent the
battery from running down, operate the power seat with
the engine in operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 57
To adjust seat forward or backward
WARNING!
Type 1 (Manual)
To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to
move the seat forward or backward without using
the adjusting lever.
3
Type 2 (Power, driver’s side only–if so equipped)
G21B0620
Pull the seat adjusting lever and slide the seat forward or
backward to the desired position. Release the adjusting
lever to lock the seat in position.
G22B0190
Push the switch to adjust the seat forward or backward to
the desired position. Release the switch, and the seat will
lock at that position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
1. Backward
2. Forward
To recline the seatback
CAUTION!
Operate the power seat with care not to have the
hand or foot caught by the seat.
G21C0700
In order to recline the seatback, first lean your body
forward slightly and pull the seatback lock lever up, and
then lean backward to the desired position and release
the lever. The seatback will lock in that position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 59
Memory reclining knob
When you fold down the seatback by using the memory
reclining knob, the angle of the seatback will be memo-
rized.
3
Memory reclining
knob
G21C0880
Just by pushing the seatback up into position will lock it
in the memorized position.
G21C0870
Pull the memory reclining knob and fold the seatback
down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To minimize risk of severe or fatal personal injury in
the event of a collision or sudden stop, both the
driver and passenger seatbacks should always re-
main in a nearly upright position while the vehicle is
in motion.
Pull the seatback lock lever, and the seatback will
return to its original position. When operating the
lever, sit close to the seatback or check with your
hand on it.
The protection provided by the seat belts will be
reduced significantly the more the seatback is re-
clined.
There is greater risk that the seat belts will not be
properly positioned on your body and/or you will
slide under the belt in an accident the more the
seatback is reclined, resulting in severe or fatal
injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 61
To adjust seat height (Driver’s side only)
Type 2 (Power, driver’s side only-if so equipped)
Front and/ or rear parts of the seat cushion height can be
adjusted.
Type 1 (Manual)
Front part of the seat cushion
3
G21D0830
Turn the knob to raise or lower the whole seat cushion.
G22D0300
1. Raise
Push the switch to raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion.
2. Lower
1. Raise
2. Lower
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Rear part of the seat cushion
Whole seat cushion
G22D0310
G22D0320
Push the switch to raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion.
Push the center of the switch to raise or lower the whole
seat cushion.
1. Raise
1. Raise
2. Lower
2. Lower
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 63
For access to the rear seat (passenger side entry)
To adjust lumbar support (Driver’s side only, if so
equipped)
3
Weak
Strong
G01J0310
G21E0230
To permit rear seat entry or exit, the front seatback will
fold down and the seat will move forward when the
seatback lock lever is pulled up or when the pedal in back
of the front passenger seat is depressed.
A lumbar support is included in the seatback of the
driver’s seat. The support has a three position adjust-
ment.
To return the seat, push the seatback backward until there
is a “click” and the seat locks in position.
NOTE: The driver’s side seatback will fold down only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
REAR SEATS
Rear seat capacity
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide
additional cargo area.
Pull the left and/ or right release knobs, and fold the rear
seatbacks forward.
WARNING!
•
•
The rear seating capacity of this vehicle is three
people.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
The rear seat occupants should always wear their
seat belts when the vehicle is in motion.
Fold down rear seatbacks
Lock knob
G26A0140T
Padded head restraints for the front seats reduce the risk
of whiplash injury in the event of a rear impact.
G02C0750
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 65
Adjustment of the head restraints
Adjust the head restraint height so that the center of the
restraint is as close as possible to your seated eye level.
Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their seated
eye level, should adjust the restraint as high as possible.
• To raise the restraint, push in the lock knob and pull it
straight up.
3
• To lower the restraint, push down on it while pressing
the lock knob in the direction indicated by the arrow.
• After adjusting the height, lift up to confirm that it is
locked in position.
G26B0210
WARNING!
•
•
Failure to have head restraints properly mounted
and adjusted may increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision.
WARNING!
Driving with the head restraints removed can lead to
serious injury to you and your passengers in an
accident. Always have them mounted and properly
adjusted before operating the vehicle. Failure to do
so may increase the chance of injury in a collision.
A cushion or similar device should not be placed
on the seatback as it may increase the distance
between your head and the head restraint and
reduce the effectiveness of the restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
SEAT BELTS
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle for the protection
of the driver and passengers.
Always use the seat belts. In an accident, injury to the
driver and passengers may be reduced if the seat belts are
properly used.
WARNING!
•
•
Lock all doors before driving to reduce the risk of
injury or ejection in a collision.
Seat belts should always be worn by every adult who
drives or rides in this vehicle, and by all children
who are large enough to wear seat belts properly.
NOTE: Legislation in your state may require seat belt
usage; however, even if it is not required seat belts should
always be used.
•
•
Never use one seat belt for more than one occupant.
Never carry more people in the vehicle than there
are seat belts.
•
•
Always adjust the belt for a snug fit.
Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder
and across your chest. Never put it behind you or
under your arm.
•
•
Always wear the lap belt as low as possible across
your hips, not around your waist.
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury in a
collision, including from a deploying driver air
bag, the driver should adjust the driver’s seat to
the rear most position that still allows good vis-
ibility and good control of the steering wheel, the
brake, accelerator, and vehicle controls.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 67
WARNING!
WARNING!
•
To reduce the risk of severe or fatal injury from a
deploying passenger air bag, make sure the pas-
senger is also properly wearing their seat belt,
remains sitting well back and upright in their seat
and the seat is moved as far back as possible.
Refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
air bag” on page 87.
•
Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat
belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate
child restraint system. To reduce the risk of severe
or fatal injury in a collision, including from the
deployment of a front passenger air bag, children
should be seated only in the rear seat. Infants
must be in a rear-facing child safety seat and be
seated only in the rear seat.
3
•
•
Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on
your lap when riding in a vehicle even if you are
wearing your seat belt. Also never place any part
of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant
or child. To do so risks severe or fatal injury to
your child in a collision or sudden stop.
UNIBELT restraint system
All seats are equipped with a UNIBELT system which
uses a single combined lap-and-shoulder belt with an
emergency locking retractor.
This system is designed to provide comfort and safety by
permitting full extension and automatic retraction of the
belts during normal vehicle operation. A sensing device
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the retractor in
the event of an abrupt change in vehicle motion.
All children 12 years old and under should always
ride in the rear seat, properly restrained, in order
to reduce risk of serious or fatal injury in a
collision, including from the deployment of a
front passenger air bag. Refer to “Child restraints”
on page 74.
NOTE: For instruction on how to install a child restraint
system, see “Installing a child restraint system with a
UNIBELT” on page 80.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
UNIBELT instructions
All vehicle occupant’s should sit and remain seated all
the way back in their seat with their back resting straight
against the upright seat back.
WARNING!
To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event
of a collision or sudden stop, both the driver and
passenger seatbacks should always be in a nearly
upright position while the vehicle is in motion.
The protection provided by the seat belts may be
reduced significantly when the seatback is reclined.
There is greater risk that the driver or the passenger
will slide under the belt and be seriously injured
when the seatback is reclined.
G28A0210
1. Get in the vehicle and sit in a normal correct posture.
To reduce the risk of severe or fatal injury caused by an
inflating air bag, adjust the driver’s seat to the rear most
position that still allows you to fully apply the pedals,
easily control the steering wheel and safely operate the
vehicle. The front passenger should also adjust their seat
as far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) - air bag” on page 87.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 69
3
G28A0220
G28A0230
2. Grasp the metal tongue and slide it up the webbing so
that it becomes easy to pull across your body.
After a couple of tries this will become an automatic
one-handed motion.
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the metal
tongue. This system will not lock up if you stop or
hesitate, so relax and continue to “buckle-up”.
Push the metal tongue into the buckle until a “click” is
heard. Pull up on the belt to confirm the metal tongue is
locked securely in the buckle.
NOTE If the seat belt is pulled to its full extension, it can
:
enter the ALR mode and lock in position. If this occurs,
allow the belt to fully retract and then repeat step 3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
NOTE: If a person wearing the seat belt moves their
upper body or the belt completely unwinds, the retractor
may switch to its Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
child restraint installation mode and lock (see page 80),
thus preventing further movement. If this happens, the
person should switch the retractor back to its Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR) mode by unlatching the buckle
and letting the belt fully retract. The person should then
put the seat belt back on repeating steps 1 through 4.
WARNING!
G28A0240
•
•
Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and as low
as possible across the hips, not around the waist.
Failure to do so may increase the chance or sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision.
4. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to ensure
that there is no slack in the lap belt. The belt will retain
the small amount of slack necessary for comfort when
you return to your normal seating position. If the belt is
still too tight, pull out 6 to 8 inches of webbing, release
the belt, and let it return to your chest.
Wear the seat belt without twisting it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 71
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (front seats)
3
G28A0260
G08C0070
5. The shoulder belt portion will allow regular move-
ment under normal conditions. The belt will lock in the
event of an abrupt change in vehicle motion.
The seat belt shoulder anchor height can be adjusted for
greater comfort.
To move the anchor down, depress the lock knob (A). To
move the anchor up, simply slide the anchor up to the
desired position (there is no need to depress the lock
knob).
6. To release the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt retracts automatically, so hold the tongue when the
belt is released and while it retracts. Should the belt not
fully return to its stowed position, pull the shoulder belt
down slightly and release quickly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert™) will be
reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more
than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5
mph (8 km/ h).
WARNING!
To reduce risk of serious injury in a collision, adjust
the anchor at a position so that the belt passes over
your shoulder, but does not touch your neck.
Always adjust the anchor when vehicle is not in
motion.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert™) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
Make sure the anchor is securely latched after ad-
justment.
NOTE
:
The following steps must occur within the first 60
seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. The manufacturer does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert™).
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert™)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/ h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert™) will alert the driver to buckle their
seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is
triggered, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert™)
will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning
Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is
buckled.
• Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
• Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY/ RUN
position (engine does not need to be running), and
wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
• Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 73
• Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
Seat belt extender
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert™) can be reac-
tivated by repeating this procedure.
3
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert™) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unfastened.
G28A0160
If the seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, a
seat belt extender is available from your dealer. The
extender may be used for either front seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
The child restraint system should be appropriate for your
child’s weight and height and properly fit the vehicle’s
seat.
WARNING!
•
•
The extender should only be used if the existing
belt is not long enough.
Persons who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of a colli-
sion.
All children should be restrained in a restraint device that
offers the maximum protection for their size and age.
• Children less than 1 year and less than 20 pounds must
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat only in the rear
seat.
• Children older than 1 year who weigh less than 40
pounds or are less than 40 inches tall should be in a
forward-facing restraint in the rear seat.
• Children who weigh more than 40 pounds or are more
than 40 inches tall - regardless of age - should use a
booster seat in the rear seat until the lap/ shoulder belt
fits properly.
When not required, the extender must be removed
and stowed because the use of the extender when
not required may deactivate the seat belt locking
mechanism.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
When transporting infants or small children in your
vehicle, an appropriate child restraint system should
always be used. This is required by law in most states.
Child restraints specifically designed for infants and
small children are offered by several manufacturers. Only
choose a child restraint system with a label certifying it
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 75
WARNING!
•
•
All children 12 years old and under should be
seated in the rear seat, and properly restrained.
Accident statistics indicate that children of all
sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat rather than in the front seat.
3
Any child who is too large to use a child restraint
should ride in the rear seat and wear the lap and
shoulder belt properly. The shoulder belt should
be over the shoulder and across the chest, not
across the neck, and the lap belt should be low on
the child’s hips, not across the stomach. If neces-
sary, a booster seat should be used for proper seat
belt fit; follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Only use a booster seat that certifies
it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
G28A0890
WARNING!
Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your
lap when riding in a vehicle, even if you are wearing
your seat belt. Also never place any part of your seat
belt around an infant or child. To do so risks severe
or fatal injury to the child in a collision or sudden
stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Air bag cover
G28G3170
G28G1060
WARNING!
WARNING!
This vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger
air bag. Rear facing child restraints place an infant
too close to the air bag, the force of an inflating front
passenger air bag could strike a rear-facing child
restraint, causing serious or fatal injury to the child:
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS MUST
ONLY BE USED IN THE REAR SEAT.
FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS should al-
ways be used in the rear seat whenever possible; if
one must be used in the front passenger seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible and ensure that the
child stays in the child seat properly restrained.
Failure to do so could kill or cause serious injury to
the child.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 77
NOTE: Before purchasing a child restraint system, try
installing it in the rear seat to ensure a good fit. Due to the
location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
cushion it may be difficult to securely install some child
restraint systems.
If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to
either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt
has been tightened, choose another child restraint sys-
tem.
WARNING!
•
•
•
It is important to use an approved rear facing
infant restraint until the infant is one year old to
allow the infant’s neck and spine to develop
enough to support the weight of their head in the
event of a collision.
3
When installing a child restraint system, follow
the instructions provided by the manufacturer
and follow the directions in this manual. Failure
to do so can result in severe or fatal injury to your
child in a collision or sudden stop.
•
Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and
the child restraint system that you have, the child
restraint can be attached using one of the following 2
methods:
After installation, push and pull the child re-
straint system back and forth, and side to side, to
see that it is firmly secured. If the child restraint
system is not installed securely, it may cause
injury to the child or other occupants in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
•
To the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the
child restraint complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Satety Standard 213 (See page 78).
•
To the UNIBELT (See page 80).
•
When not in use, keep your child restraint system
secured with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle in order to prevent it from being thrown
inside the vehicle during an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Installing a new child restraint system to the lower
anchorage
New child restraint system that complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213
G08C0070
G18C0750
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower anchorages
for attaching a new child restraint system that complies
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
A: Rear-facing child restraint
B: Forward-facing child restraint
C: Child restraint system connectors
(These are only examples.)
NOTE
•
The marks on the seatback show the location of the
lower anchorage points.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 79
Installation
3. If your child restraint system requires the use of a top
tether strap, refer to ‘‘Tether anchors for child restraint
systems’’ on page 83.
4. Push and pull the child restraint system in all direc-
tions to be sure it is firmly secured.
3
NOTE
:
• For a new child restraint system that complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213, it is not
necessary to secure the child restraint system using the
vehicle’s seat belt.
G18D0240
1. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and
the seatback (B) with your hand to locate the lower
anchorages (C).
2. Push the child restraint system’s connectors into the
lower anchorages (C) in accordance with the instructions
provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Installing a child restraint system to a UNIBELT
at the rear seat positions or the front passenger
seat (With emergency/automatic locking
mechanism)
WARNING!
•
If there is any foreign material in or around the
connectors, remove it before installing the child
restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is
away from, not looped through or otherwise in-
terferes with the child restraint system. If foreign
matter is not removed and/or the seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint system, the child
restraint system will not be secured properly and
could move forward in the event of sudden brak-
ing or a collision, seriously injuring the child and
possible other vehicle occupants.
•
When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust the seat
where the child restraint system is installed.
G18C0790
The UNIBELT at the rear seat positions, and at the front
passenger seat, can be converted from normal Emergency
Locking retractor (ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode. It must be converted to the ALR
mode when installing a child restraint system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 81
Children 12 years old and under should be restrained in
the rear seat only, whenever possible, although the front
passenger seat belt can also be the converted to ALR
mode.
Installation:
1. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating
position as shown in the illustration.
3
WARNING!
•
Before placing an infant or child in a child re-
straint system, be absolutely certain you con-
verted the retractor from the ELR mode to the ALR
mode. The ALR mode will keep the child restraint
system tightly secured to the seat.
Failure to convert the retractor to the ALR mode
may allow the child restraint system to move
forward during sudden braking or in a collision,
seriously injuring the child or other occupants.
G18C0540
2. Route the unibelt through the child restraint system
according to the child restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions. Then insert the unibelt latch plate into the
buckle. Make sure you hear a ЉclickЉ when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
G18C0550
G18C0560
3. To activate the ALR mode, slowly pull the shoulder
part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the
belt feed back into the retractor.
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the
shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to
remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remem-
ber, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child
restraint system will not be secure. It may help to put
weight on the child restraint system and/ or push on its
seatback while pulling up on the belt (see illustration).
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is
locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and not in the ALR mode. You
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 83
6. If your child restraint system requires the use of a top
tether strap, refer to “Anchors for the child restraint
system” on page 83.
Tether anchors for the child restraint system
7. Before putting the child in the restraint, push and pull
the restraint in all directions to be sure it is firmly secure.
Do this before each use. If the child restraint system is not
firmly secure, repeat steps 1 through 6.
3
8. To remove a child restraint system and deactivate the
ALR mode, remove the child from the restraint. Unlatch
the buckle, remove the belt from the restraint and let the
belt fully retract.
G28B1090
In compliance with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards, your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear seat. For
securing a child seat tether strap to each of the 3 rear
seating positions (2 outer and 1 center) in your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Tether strap anchor installation
WARNING!
Child restraint tether anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by a correctly
fitted child restraint system.
Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
seats, or harnesses, or for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
Children who have outgrown child restraint
systems
Children who have outgrown a child restraint system
should be seated in the rear seat and wear the UNIBELT.
If the shoulder belt crosses their face or neck, and/ or the
lap belt crosses their stomach, a commercially available
booster seat must be used to raise the child so that the
shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the lap belt
remains positioned low across their hips. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and should have a label
certifying compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
G28B0980
1. Lift the cover from the tether anchor installation point
by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated.
2. Latch the top tether strap hook (A) of the child seat
onto the tether anchor bracket (B) and tighten the top
tether strap hook so it is securely fastened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 85
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
•
•
Children who are not buckled up, with all the
doors locked, can be thrown out of the vehicle or
otherwise be seriously or fatally injured in the
event of a collision.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
3
A child should never be left unattended or unsu-
pervised around the vehicle. When you leave the
vehicle, always take the child out as well.
•
•
Children can die from heat stroke if trapped
inside vehicles, especially on hot days.
Keep vehicles locked and trunks closed when not
in use. Keep vehicle keys away from children.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF SEAT
BELTS
Sleeve
Good
The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with mild soap or
detergent solution. Allow the belts to dry in the shade.
Do not allow them to retract until completely dry. Do not
attempt to bleach or re-dye belts. The color may rub off
and webbing strength could be affected.
No Good
Regularly check seat belt buckles and release mecha-
nisms for positive action and the retractors when in the
automatic locking retractor mode for positive engage-
ment. Refer to “Installing a child restraint system to a
UNIBELT” on page 80.
Sleeve
Check that the anchor mounting bolts are tight. If the seat
belt webbing shows obvious cuts, tears, protruding bro-
ken fibers that cause a local increase in webbing thick-
ness, or severe fading which indicates weakening by
exposure to sunlight, the entire seat belt assembly should
be replaced.
G28A0420
The lap belt portion of the front UNIBELT has a sleeve
inside which the belt is folded back over itself in a loop.
This allows the belt to help absorb the energy of a
collision through a controlled release of the loop. In the
event that the loop inside the sleeve has come loose,
replace the entire seat belt assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 87
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS), which includes air bags for the driver and
front passenger. The SRS air bag is designed to supple-
ment the primary protection of the driver and front
passenger side seat belt systems by providing those
occupants with protection against head and chest injuries
in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS
side air bag (if so equipped) is also designed to supple-
ment the seat belts and provide the driver and front
passenger with protection against chest injuries in certain
moderate to severe side impact collisions.
WARNING!
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and
attaching hardware, should be inspected by an au-
thorized dealer after any collision. We recommend
that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision
be replaced unless the collision was very minor and
the belts show no damage and continue to operate
properly.
3
Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the
seat belt assemblies; that work should be done by an
authorized dealer. Failure to have an authorized
dealer perform the work could reduce the effective-
ness of the belts and could result in serious or fatal
injury in a collision.
The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts. For
maximum protection in all types of crashes and acci-
dents, seat belts must ALWAYS be worn by everyone
who drives or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
children in an appropriate child restraint in the rear seat,
and older children buckled in the rear seat). Refer to
‘‘Child Restraints’’ on page 74.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
WARNING!
WARNING!
• IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS WEAR
YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY EVEN WITH
AN AIR BAG.
• IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY
SEATED.
A driver or front passenger sitting too close to the
steering wheel or instrument panel during air bag
deployment can be killed or seriously injured
• Seat belts help keep the driver and front pas-
senger properly positioned. This reduces the
risk of injury in all collisions, and reduces the
risk of serious or fatal injuries when the air bags
inflate. During sudden braking just before a
collision, an unrestrained or improperly re-
strained driver or front passenger can move
forward into direct contact with, or within close
proximity to, the air bag when it begins to
inflate. The beginning stage of air bag inflation
is the most forceful and can cause serious or
fatal injuries if the occupant comes in contact
with the air bag at this time.
Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force. If
the driver and front passenger are not properly
seated and restrained, the air bag may not provide
proper protection, and could cause serious or fatal
injuries when it inflates.
• Before driving, adjust the driver’s seat as far back
as possible without affecting your ability to be in
complete control of the vehicle.
• Before driving, adjust the front passenger seat as
far back as possible.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in rollovers,
side or rear impact collisions, and in lower-
speed frontal collisions, because the air bags are
not designed to inflate in those situations.
• Make sure all vehicle occupants are always prop-
erly restrained using the available seat belts.
• With seat belts properly fastened, the driver and
front passenger should sit well back in their seats
and remain upright without leaning against the
window or door.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from
your vehicle in a collision or rollover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 89
3
G28G1570
G28G1760
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean your head
or chest close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.
• Infants and small children should never ride
unrestrained, or lean against the instrument
panel. They should never ride held in your arms
or on your lap. They could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision, especially when the air bag
inflates. Children should be properly seated in
the rear seat in an appropriate child restraint
system. Refer to ‘‘Child Restraints’’ on page 74.
• Seat all infants and children 12 years of age and
under in the rear seat properly restrained using an
appropriate child restraint system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Air bag cover
G28G3170
G28G1060
WARNING!
•
REAR- FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS must
NOT be used in the front passenger seat as it
places an infant too close to the passenger air bag.
The force of an inflating air bag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child.
Rear-facing child restraints must only be used in
the rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 91
WARNING!
•
•
FRONT- FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS should
be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they
must be used in the front passenger seat, move the
seat to the full rear position. Failure to do so could
kill or cause serious injuries to the child.
3
Older children up to and including 12 year olds,
should be seated in the rear seat with their seat
belt properly worn and with an appropriate
booster seat if needed.
How the Supplemental Restraint System works
The SRS includes the following components:
1. Air bag module (Driver)
2. Air bag module (Passenger)
3. Air bag control unit (including the front impact sen-
sors)
4. SRS warning light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
The air bags will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘START’’ position.
When an impact sensor detects a front or side impact of
sufficient force, it automatically ignities materials in the
module inflator which generate gas and inflates the
appropriate air bags.
NOTE A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.
Deployment of the air bags produces a sudden, loud
noise and releases some smoke and powder. This is not
dangerous and does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
People with breathing problems may feel some tempo-
rary irritation from chemicals used to inflate the bags. If
irritation continues see your doctor. You may open the
windows after air bags inflates, if it is safe to do so.
5. Side air bag modules (if so equipped)
6. Side impact sensors (if so equipped)
The air bag control unit monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition
switch is in the ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘START’’ position. These
include all of the items listed above and all related
wiring.
After deployment, the air bags deflate very rapidly, so
there is little danger of not being able to see. The time
between the sensors first detecting an impact and the air
bags deflating after deployment is shorter than a blink of
an eye.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 93
WARNING!
•
Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force.
In certain situations, contact with an inflating air
bag may cause small cuts, abrasions, and bruises.
3
Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag system
Driver
WARNING!
•
Do not attach anything to the steering wheel’s
padded cover, such as trim material, badges, etc.
These could strike and injure an occupant if the
air bag inflates.
Front passenger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Side air bag system (if so equipped)
WARNING!
•
Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the
instrument panel above the glove compartment. Such
items could strike and injure an occupant if the air
bag inflates.
•
•
Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment
on or behind the knee bolsters.
Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of,
the windshield. They could restrict the air bag infla-
tion, or strike and injure an occupant, when the air
bag inflates.
•
Do not put packages, pets or other objects between
the air bags and either the driver or the front passen-
ger. This could affect air bag performance, or could
cause severe or even fatal injury when the air bag
inflates.
The side air bags (A) are contained in the driver and front
passenger seatbacks.
•
•
Right after air bag inflation, several parts of the air
bag system will be hot. Do not touch them. You could
be burned.
The air bag system is designed to work only once.
After the air bags deploy, they will not work again.
They must promptly be replaced and the entire air
bag system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 95
WARNING!
•
The side air bags are designed to supplement the
driver and front passenger seat belts in certain
side impacts. Seat belts should always be worn
properly, and the driver and front passenger
should sit well back and upright in their seats
without leaning against the window or door.
3
G28L0160
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehicles with side
air bags.
The side air bag is designed to inflate only on the side of
the vehicle that is hit.
Because the side air bags do not protect the occupants in
all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
WARNING!
•
•
In order to reduce risk of injury from a deploying
side air bag, do not allow any rear seat passengers
to hold onto the back of either front seat. Special
care should be taken with children.
Do not place any objects near or around the front
of either front seatback. Such objects could inter-
fere with proper side air bag inflation, and could
also cause injury if thrown by the deployment of
the side air bag.
•
•
Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on
the back of either front seat. It could interfere
with proper side air bag inflation.
WARNING!
Do not install seat covers on seats with side air
bags. Do not re-cover the seats that have side air
bags. Covers could interfere with proper side air
bag inflation.
•
The side air bag inflates with great force. In order
to reduce the risk of serious or possibly fatal
injury when the air bag is inflating, the driver and
front passenger should not put their arms out in
the windows or lean against the doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 97
SRS warning light
WARNING!
•
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Rear-facing child restraints MUST
ONLY be used in the rear seat. Forward-facing child
restraints should also be used in the rear seat. If a
forward-facing child restraint must be used in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
and make sure that the child stays in the child restraint
and away from the door.
3
Do not allow the child to lean against or close to the
passenger door even if the child is seated in a child
restraint system. The child’s head should also not lean
against or be close to the section of the seatback where
the side air bag is located. It is dangerous if the side air
bag inflates. Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious or fatal injury to the child.
G28G3980
There is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning
light on the instrument panel. The system checks itself
each time the ignition is turned on and the light indicates
if there is a problem.
•
Work done around and on the side air bag system
components should only be done by an authorized
dealer. Improper work methods could cause an acci-
dental side air bag deployment, or could make a side
air bag inoperable. Either of these situations could
result in serious injury. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has air bags.
When the ignition key is turned to the ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘START’’
position, the warning light should come on for several
seconds and then go out. This means the system is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
working properly. The SRS warning light is shared by the
driver’s air bag, the front passenger’s air bag, and the
optional side air bags.
WARNING!
•
Any maintenance performed on or near the com-
ponents of the SRS should be performed only by
an authorized dealer. Do not permit anyone else to
do service, inspection, maintenance or repair on
any SRS components or wiring. Similarly, no part
of the SRS should ever be handled, removed or
disposed of by anyone except at an authorized
dealer.
The air bags will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘START’’ position
WARNING!
•
If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS
is not working properly and you should immedi-
ately have it inspected by an authorized dealer;
Improper work on the SRS components or wiring
could result in an accidental air bag deployment
or could make the SRS inoperative. Either of these
situation could result in serious injury.
•
The SRS warning light does not illuminate
when you start the vehicle.
•
•
Do not modify your steering wheel or any other SRS
components or related vehicle part. For example,
replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications
to the front bumper or body structure can negatively
affect SRS performance and may lead to possible
injury.
•
•
The SRS warning light does not go out after
several seconds.
The SRS warning light comes on while driving.
SRS servicing
If your vehicle has received any front-end dam-
age, you should have the SRS inspected by an
authorized dealer to make sure it is in proper
working order.
The entire SRS must be inspected by an authorized dealer
10 years after the vehicle’s manufacture date as shown on
the certification label located on the center pillar of the
vehicle, on the driver’s side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS 99
•
If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, we urge
you to first take it to an authorized dealer so that the
SRS can be made safe for disposal.
WARNING!
•
•
On vehicles with side air bags, do not modify
your front seats, center pillar or center console.
Such modifications can adversely affect SRS per-
formance and may lead to possible injury.
Caution label
3
Also, if you discover any tear or open seam in the
seat fabric near the side air bag, have the seat
inspected by an authorized dealer.
On vehicles with side air bags, if your vehicle has
received any damage on either side, you should
have the SRS inspected by an authorized dealer to
make sure it is in proper working order.
NOTE:
When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to another
•
person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is
equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the
applicable sections in this owner’s manual.
Passenger restraint warning/ caution labels for the SRS
are located in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 SEATS, SEAT BELTS, CHILD RESTRAINTS AND AIR BAGS
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Meter cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Indicator and warning light package . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Odometer/ Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Turn signal indicators/ hazard warning lights . . 110
▫ High beam indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Theft-alarm indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Door-ajar warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Anti-lock braking system warning light
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4
▫ Cruise/ speed control indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Low-fuel warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Front fog light indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Malfunction indicator light
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)-air bag
warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Seat belt reminder/ warning light. . . . . . . . . . . 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
▫ Changing the setting for warning operation . . . 116
Ⅵ Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Ⅵ Instrument panel light dimmer control. . . . . . . 123
Ⅵ Electric rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Ⅵ Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ⅵ Intermittent wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Ⅵ Windshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Automatic transaxle indicator
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Traction Control System warning light
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Washer fluid level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Ⅵ Combination headlights, dimmer and
Ⅵ Precautions to observe when using wipers
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ⅵ Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Light auto-cutout feature
(headlights, fog lights, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ⅵ Lights (dome lights, etc.) auto-cutout
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ When you want to keep the lights on
Ⅵ Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Ⅵ Rear personal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ⅵ Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Ⅵ Garage door opener (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Training the Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . 131
(time delay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Headlight reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Headlight flasher (high/ low beam) . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Dimmer (high/ low beam change) . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Turn signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Ⅵ Fog light switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 103
▫ Canadian Programming/ Gate Programming. . . 133
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Reprogramming a Signal Button . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
6. Trip odometer
7. Trip odometer reset button
D01A1960
Meter cluster
1. Fuel gauge
2. Tachometer
3. Speedometer
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Odometer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 105
4
D50A439D
Indicator and warning light package
5. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag
warning light →P. 114
1. Washer fluid level indicator →P. 117
6. Seat belt reminder/ warning light →P. 116
7. Turn signal indicators/ hazard warning light →P. 110
8. Trunk-ajar warning light →P 111
9. Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) →P. 112
10. Door-ajar warning light →P. 110
2. Anti-lock braking system warning light
(if so equipped) →P. 111
3. Low-fuel warning light →P. 111
4. Brake warning light →P. 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
11. High beam indicator →P. 110
12. Cruise control indicator →P. 111
Tachometer
2.4 liter
engine
3.0 liter
engine
13. Theft-alarm indicator (if so equipped) →P. 110
14. Malfunction indicator light
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON) →P. 113
15. Oil pressure warning light →P. 112
16. Charging system warning light →P. 112
17. Overheating warning light →P. 114
18. Traction control system warning light
(if so equipped) →P. 116
D04A0500
19. Automatic transaxle indicator
(Vehicles with Autostick automatic transaxle-if so
equipped) →P. 116
The tachometer indicates engine revolutions per minute.
This allows the driver to determine the most efficient
gear range and engine speed combinations.
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
•
•
The outer scale indicates miles per hour.
The inner scale indicates kilometers per hour.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 107
Fuel gauge
CAUTION!
The red zone indicates an engine speed in excess of
safe operation.
Select the correct gear to control engine speed so the
tachometer indicator does not enter the red zone.
4
D05A0430
The gauge shows the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition key is turned to the ‘‘on’’ position.
The arrow A indicates that the fuel lid (fuel filler port) is
located on the right side of the vehicle. (Refer to “Fuel
filler” on page 39.)
NOTE: Just after refueling, it takes a little time until the
correct fuel level is indicated after turning on the ignition
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Odometer/Trip odometer
3. Reset button
1
D03F0320
D03F0120
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position,
an “ODO” or “TRIP” indication is given.
Every time the reset button (3) is pressed lightly (less
than one second), the indicators will change from “ODO”
to “Trip A” to “Trip B”.
ODO --- Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has
travelled.
TRIP --- Trip odometer
The trip odometer indicates the distance traveled during
a particular trip or period.
1. Odometer
As a feature, there are two trip odometer displays:
2. Trip odometer
and
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 109
Trip
since the current trip began and Trip
measure the distance from an intermediate location.
To return either Trip or Trip display to zero,
can be used to measure the distance traveled
can be used to
press the reset button (3) for more than one second. Only
the currently displayed value will be reset.
4
If Trip
is displayed, for example, only Trip
will
be reset.
NOTE
D06A0460
1. Display TRIP
and TRIP
each have a maxi-
Engine coolant temperature gauge
mum distance of 9999.9 mile (16 093.28 km)
This gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
When the engine temperature is low, the indicator will
remain at the “C” (cold) position. The indicator will
gradually rise as the engine is warmed up.
2. When disconnecting the battery for a long time, the
memory of trip meter display
and
will clear,
The indicator will normally stay near the center while
driving, but may rise slightly in congested traffic or when
the engine is under a heavy load.
and the display returns to “0”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Theft-alarm indicator
When the theft-alarm system has been
CAUTION!
armed, the indicator located in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate and go off in 20
seconds, indicating the system is armed. (See “Theft-
alarm system” on page 48.)
While driving, care should always be taken to main-
tain normal engine operating temperature. If the
indicator enters the “H” (hot) position while driving,
the engine is overheating. (Refer to “Engine over-
heating” on page 272.)
Door-ajar warning light and chime
This light illuminates when either door or
the trunk is open or not completely closed.
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
mph (8 km/ h) and the door is open or ajar,
a chime will sound to inform the driver that
the door is not properly shut.
al indicators/hazard warning lights
The arrow will flash in unison with the
corresponding exterior turn signals when
the turn signal lever is operated.
Both arrows will flash intermittently when the hazard
warning flasher switch is pressed.
NOTE: If the signal indicator blinks too fast, the cause
may be a faulty turn-signal connection or faulty lamp
bulb.
CAUTION!
Before driving, check to ensure that the door-ajar
warning light is off.
m indicator
A blue light illuminates when the head-
lights are on high beam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 111
Trunk-ajar warning light and chime
This light illuminates when the trunk lid is
2. If the light does not go out or if it illuminates again,
the anti-lock braking system is not functioning, and only
the standard braking system is functioning.
If this occurs, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
and have the system checked.
open or not completely closed.
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
mph (8 km/ h) and the trunk lid is open or
ajar, a chime will sound to inform the driver that the
trunk lid is not properly shut.
NOTE: If the light remains illuminated after the engine
is started, it indicates that a fault has occured in the
Anti-lock brake system. The standard brake system will
function normally. (Refer to “Anti-lock braking system”
on page 169).
4
Anti-lock braking system warning light (if so
This light comes on in the event of a mal-
function in the anti-lock braking system.
Always be sure that the light goes out
before beginning to drive.
Cruise/speed control indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the
cruise/ speed control main switch is “ON”.
It also comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and should go out shortly after starting
the engine.
Low-fuel warning light and chime
When the fuel level in the fuel tank gets
low, the light illuminates and the chime will
also sound. It is recommended that fuel be
added as soon as this light illuminates.
If the light illuminates during driving;
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.
Test the system by restarting the engine and driving at a
speed of about 12 mph (20 km/ h) or higher.
If the light goes out, there is no abnormal condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level;
running out of fuel could cause damage to the
catalytic converter.
If the charging light remains on after the engine has
started, the battery charging system may be malfunc-
tioning. In this case, take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer and have the system checked.
Front fog light indicator
This indicator illuminates while the fog
lights are on.
re warning light
This light illuminates when the engine oil
pressure is below normal. If the light stays
on while driving, stop the engine as soon as possible and
do not drive until the cause of the low oil pressure is
corrected.
NOTE: Fog lights will not be operational when high
beam (headlights) are selected.
Charging system warning light
This light illuminates in the event of a
malfunction in the charging system.
This light illuminates when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off). When the
engine is started, the light should go off. Always be sure
that the light goes out before beginning to drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 113
Malfunction indicator light
(ENGINE SOON)
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
(OBD) system which monitors the emis-
sions, engine and automatic transaxle con-
trol systems. If a problem is detected in one
of these systems, this light may illuminate. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
•
•
If this light illuminates and the engine oil level is
not low, have your vehicle checked at an autho-
rized dealer.
This warning light does not indicate the amount
of oil in the crankcase. This must be determined
by checking the oil level with the dipstick while
the engine is turned off.
4
This light will also illuminate for a few seconds, when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. If it does not
go off after a few seconds, take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Overheating warning light
If the warning light illuminates while the
CAUTION!
•
•
Prolonged driving with the malfunction indicator
light on may result in further damage to the
emission control system. Continued driving could
also affect fuel economy and driveability.
engine is running, it is possible that the
engine is overheated.
Immediately park your vehicle in a safe
place and make the necessary corrections.
(Refer to ‘‘Engine overheating’’ on page 272.)
If the light does not illuminate when the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position (bulb check),
have the system checked at an authorized dealer.
While driving, care should always be taken to maintain
the normal operating temperature.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery cable when the
Malfunction indicator light (SERVICE ENGINE SOON) is
ON.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)-air bag
warning light
This light illuminates when the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System-air bag is not working
properly. It will also illuminate for about 7
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position or after the engine is started. The light should
then go out.
Check the light every time the vehicle is started.
If it does not illuminate, or stays on for more than
approximately 7 seconds after the ignition key is turned
“ON” or after the engine is started, or if it comes on while
The engine electronic control module stores critical OBD
data, which may be lost if the battery is disconnected.
This can make rapid diagnosis more difficult.
If the fuel tank filler cap is not secured properly, the
light may come on. Be sure the fuel tank filler tube cap
is tightened every time you add fuel. (Turn the fuel
tank filler cap clockwise until you hear clicking
sounds.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 115
driving, take your vehicle to your authorized dealer and
have the system checked.
[See “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” on page
114.]
If the brake warning light illuminates while driving, it
could mean braking performance deterioration. Park
your vehicle in a safe place using the following proce-
dures:
Brake warning light
1. If, when pressing the brake pedal, braking is poor,
press your foot harder against the brake pedal.
This light illuminates when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off).
When the engine is started, the light should go off. But
when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid falls
below the prescribed level, the light illuminates.
Before driving your vehicle, release the parking brake
fully and make certain that the brake warning light has
gone out.
4
2. Should the braking deteriorate, use engine braking by
shifting the transaxle into a lower gear (Manual transaxle
or Automatic transaxle autostick) or into the ‘‘3’’ (THIRD)
or the ‘‘2’’ (SECOND) or the ‘‘L’’ (LOW) position (Auto-
matic transaxle) to reduce the speed and slowly pull the
parking brake lever, while applying pressure against the
brake pedal.
Depress the brake pedal to turn on the stop light (brake
light) to alert the vehicles behind you.
CAUTION!
If the brake warning light does not go on when you
pull the parking brake lever, or if it does not go out
when you release the lever, contact an authorized
dealer immediately.
CAUTION!
Suddenly applying the parking brake is dangerous,
the wheels may lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Seat belt reminder/warning light
3. With the seat belt still fastened, confirm that the
warning light goes off.
A chime and warning light are used to
remind the driver to fasten the seat belt.
When the ignition key is turned to the
‘‘ON’’ position, the warning light will illu-
4. Within 1 minute of seeing the warning light go off,
remove the plate from the buckle and re-insert it 3 times.
minate and a chime will sound for about 6
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ‘‘LOCK’’ or ‘‘ACC’’
position. The buzzer (with a short tone) will sound once
to indicate that the setting change is complete.
seconds. If the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened
approximately 1 minute later, the warning light will flash
and the chime sound intermittently (each 12 times) when
the vehicle is driven. If the driver subsequently unfastens
the seat belt while driving, the warning light and chime
will issue further warnings. And if the seat belt remains
unfastened, the warning light and chime will issue
further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving.
When the seat belt is fastened, the warnings will stop.
NOTE
•
If the driver’s door is open at this time, the buzzer
(with long intermittent tones) will sound continously
but the setting change will not be completed. To
complete the setting change, remove the key or close
the driver’s door. The buzzer (with a short tone) will
sound once to indicate that the setting change is
complete.
Changing the setting for warning operation
It is possible to disable the warning function so that
warnings are not issued after the start of driving. (The
function is initially enabled at the factory.)
•
•
If you wish to change the setting again, perform the
same procedure again.
If you do not understand how to change the setting,
consult an authorized Mitisubishi dealer.
1. Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ‘‘ON’’ position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 117
Washer fluid level indicator
WARNING!
This light will illuminate and the chime will
sound when the windshield washer level is
low. (approximately 0.1 gal/ 0.4 L) When
the light comes on, add fluid.
In order to reduce risk of serious or fatal injury in an
accident, always wear your own seat belt, and do not
allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
is properly seated and wearing a seat belt. Children
should be properly seated and restrained in an
appropriate child restraint system.
4
Automatic transaxle indicator (if so equipped)
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the
indicator light illuminates to show the position of the
selector lever. (i.e. “PARK”, “DRIVE”, “REVERSE”, etc.)
Traction Control System warning light
(if so equipped)
This light will illuminate in the event of a
malfunction in the traction control system.
It will also come on when the ignition key is
turned to the “ON” position and should go out after the
engine starts. (See ЉTraction control systemЉ on page 192)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
COMBINATION HEADLIGHTS, DIMMER AND
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
NOTE: Do not leave the headlights and other lamps on
for a long time while the engine is not running. A
discharged battery could result.
Headlights
Light auto-cutout feature (headlights, fog lights,
etc.)
1. This feature will help prevent a discharged battery. If
the headlamps are left on “
” or “
” when leaving
the vehicle (ignition key removed, in “ACC” or “LOCK”
position), the lights will stay on for approximately 10
minutes and then turn off.
2. If the light switch is turned to ON “
” or “
”
again, the light auto-cutout will not function and the
headlamps will stay on.
When you want to keep the lights on (time delay):
The lights can be made to stay on for about 60 seconds
after the driver leaves the vehicle. This feature provides
the safety of headlight illumination when leaving your
vehicle in an unlighted area.
E11A0320
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
OFF - All lights off
- Parking, tail, front and rear side marker, license
plate and instrument panel lights on
- Headlights and other lights on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 119
1. Rotate the ignition key to “LOCK” or “ACC” position
with the light switch in the ON “ ” position.
Headlight flasher (high/low beam)
2. Turn light switch to “OFF” position within about 45
seconds of ignition key removal.
3. The headlights will stay on for about 60 seconds, then
automatically turn off.
4
Headlight reminder chime
If the driver’s door is opened (ignition key in “LOCK”,
“ACC” or out of ignition cylinder) with the light switch
in the ON “
” or “
” position, a chime will sound
to remind the driver to turn off the lights. Turning off the
light switch will stop the chime.
E11C0130
The headlights can be made to flash (high beam) when
the lever is pulled slightly to (2), and will go back to
normal when it is released. While the high beam is on, a
blue light in the instrument cluster will also illuminate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE: The headlights can also flash when the light
Turn signals
switch is OFF.
If you turn the lights off with the headlights set to
high-beam illumination, the headlights are automati-
cally returned to their low-beam setting when the light
switch is next turned to the ON “ ” position.
Dimmer (high/low beam change)
To change the headlights from high beam to low beam
and vice versa, pull the turn signal lever to (1). Switch the
headlights to low beam as a courtesy whenever there are
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic moving ahead
of you. An illuminated blue light in the instrument
cluster indicates when the headlights are on high beam.
E11D0090
For changing lanes, or when making a gradual turn, the
lever may be held in the “lane change” position (1). It will
return to the neutral position when released. The fully
engaged position (2) is for use when making a normal
turn. The lever will return automatically upon comple-
tion of the turn.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 121
There may be occasions when the lever does not return
after cornering. This typically occurs when the steering
wheel is turned only slightly. In this case, return the lever
by hand.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
The instrument cluster indicator will flash to indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If the indicator light flashes faster than usual, check for a
malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or faulty turn signal
system.
4
If the indicator fails to light when the lever is moved,
check for a faulty fuse or a burned out indicator bulb.
NOTE: Replace malfunctioning bulbs and fuses
E18A0550
promptly.
The fog lights illuminate only when the headlights are
on. Press the switch to illuminate the fog lights and press
the switch again to turn the lights off.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate while the fog lights are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NOTE
Press the flasher switch and the front and rear turn
signals will flash intermittently, as the hazard warning
lights. This is an emergency warning system and is not
intended for use when the vehicle is in motion.
1. If the headlights are switched to high beam, the fog
lights will go out; they will illuminate again when the
headlights are switched back to low beam.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle, the flasher system
will continue to operate with the ignition key removed.
2. If the light switch is rotated to OFF while the fog lights
are illuminated, they will automatically turn off. They
can be turned back on again by moving the light switch
back to ON and pressing the fog light switch again.
NOTE: If the lights are kept flashing for several hours,
the battery will be discharged (rundown), resulting in
hard engine starting or a no start condition.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
E16A0520
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 123
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT DIMMER CONTROL
ELECTRIC REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
4
Bright
Dim
Indicator
E15A0380
E17A0450
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be
adjusted by turning this knob while the light switch is in
The electric rear window defogger can be operated when
the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
the ON “
” or“
” position.
When the switch is pressed, an indicator in the switch
(amber) will illuminate to indicate the electric rear win-
dow defogger is on, and electric current will flow
through the heating wire on the rear window to clear
away fog or frost.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
It will turn off automatically in about 17 minutes.
To turn off the defogger before 17 minutes has lapsed,
push the switch again.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
CAUTION!
•
•
The rear window defroster is not designed to melt
snow. Remove snow before use of the rear win-
dow defroster.
Use the rear window defroster only after the
engine has started and is running.
Be sure to turn the defroster switch off immedi-
ately after the window is clear in order to prevent
excessive battery discharge.
E13A1500
•
•
Do not place stickers, tape or other items that are
attached with adhesive over the grid wires on the
rear window.
The windshield wipers can be operated when the wiper
lever is moved as illustrated above and the ignition key is
in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
MIST = Misting function
The wipers will operate once
OFF = Off
When cleaning the inside rear window from in-
side, use a soft cloth and wipe lightly over the
heating wires.
INT = Speed sensitive
Interval between wipers varies in accordance
with vehicle speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 125
The intermittent intervals are adjustable from approxi-
mately 3 to 18 seconds by rotating the adjusting knob at
the end of the stalk.
LO = Slow
HI = Fast
For maximum delay between wipes, rotate the knob
toward you. To shorten the delay, rotate the knob away
from you.
The delay can be regulated between approximately 3 and
18 seconds.
INTERMITTENT WIPERS
NOTE: Vehicle speed is monitored and the delay will be
shortened when the vehicle is moving above 10 mph (16
km/ h) and lengthened when the vehicle is moving below
10 mph (16 km/ h).
4
Adjusting knob
FAST
SLOW
E13A1510
Use the intermittent feature when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a pause between cycles,
desirable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WINDSHIELD WASHER
PRECAUTIONS TO OBSERVE WHEN USING
WIPERS AND WASHERS
CAUTION!
If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer
fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, resulting
in poor visibility. Heat the glass with the defroster
before using the washer.
NOTE
1. Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry; this could
scratch the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely.
E13A1300
2. Before operating the wipers in cold weather, check to
be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield. Attempting to operate the wipers while the
blades are frozen could damage the wiper motor.
The windshield washer can be operated by pulling the
lever toward you to spray fluid when the ignition key is
in either the “ON” or “ACC” position.
When washer fluid is sprayed, the wipers will automati-
cally operate several times.
3. If the wipers become blocked by ice or other deposits
on the glass, the motor may be damaged even if the
wiper switch is OFF. If obstruction occurs, park your
The spraying fluid stops when the lever is released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 127
vehicle in a safe place, turn off the ignition, and clean the
deposits from the glass so that the wipers operate
smoothly.
DOME LIGHT
Type 1
4. Avoid using the washer for more than 20 seconds at a
time. To avoid pump damage, do not operate the washer
when the fluid reservoir is empty.
4
5. During cold weather, be sure to add a washer solution
that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Failure to do
so could result in the loss of windshield washer function
and damage to the system components.
6. Replace wiper blades when they are worn to avoid
loss of visibility when in use. Use the appropriate size
replacement blades; if you have questions, ask your
authorized dealer.
E19A0970
The dome/ reading light can be operated by moving the
switch as follows:
1. (ON) - The dome light ‘‘ON’’.
2. (DOOR) - The dome light goes on when any door is
opened.
3. (OFF) - The dome light stays ‘‘OFF’’.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
LIGHTS (DOME LIGHTS, ETC.) AUTO-CUTOUT
FUNCTION
If any of the interior lights is left on with the ignition key
in the ‘‘LOCK’’ position, the light goes off automatically
after approximately 30 minutes to prevent the battery
from running down.
The light comes on again if the ignition key is turned to
the ЉONЉ or ЉACCЉ position (except ‘‘Dome Light’’ Type
2), or ‘‘ON’’ position (‘‘Dome light’’ Type 2 only), any
door is opened and closed, or the keyless entry system is
operated.
G08C0070
Push the light switch (A) to turn on the light, and push
the light switch again to turn them off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 129
READING LIGHTS
1
2
4
E19A1280
G08C0070
NOTE
:
• If the reading lights are left on for prolonged periods of
time with the engine turned off, the battery will be
discharged (run down).
1. Driver’s side
2. Passenger’s side
Push the right or left reading light switch (lens) to turn on
the light.
This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a
map light at night.
Push the reading light switch again to turn the light off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS
HORN SWITCH
E19A1270
E23A0020T
ON - The light illuminates
OFF - The light illuminates when a door is opened and
goes out when it is closed.
Pressing on or around the
causes the horn to honk.
mark on the steering wheel,
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF SO EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, or home lighting. It
triggers these devices at the push of a button, located on
your Electrochromic inside rearview mirror (if so
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 131
equipped). The transmitter operates off your vehicle’s
battery and charging system; no batteries are needed.
Training The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
For additional information on HomeLink, call toll-free
for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or on the
internet at www.homelink.com.
1. Turn off the engine.
WARNING!
4
• A moving garage door can cause injury to people
and pets in the path of the door. People or pets
could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this
transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety stop and reverse features it could cause
injury or death. Call toll-free for customer assis-
tance at 1–800–355–3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.jci.com for safety information or
assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate
can cause serious injury or death to people and
pets or damage to objects.
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons (A and B) on the universal transceiver.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Release the buttons when the light in the indicator (D)
begins to flash after 20 seconds.
3. Choose one of the three buttons to train. Place the
hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches from the universal
transceiver while keeping its indicator light in view.
A - Universal Transceiver button 1
B - Universal Transceiver button 2
C - Universal Transceiver button 3
D - Indicator light
F21A0110
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired universal transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
F21A0100
NOTE:
• Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters (E).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 133
NOTE:
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro-
gramming.
• Some entry gates and garage door openers may re-
quire you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
5. The indicator light (D) will begin to flash, first slowly
and then rapidly. The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming. If after 90 seconds the indicator light does
not flash rapidly or goes out, return to step 1 and repeat
the procedure. To train the other buttons, repeat steps 3
and 4. Be sure to keep your hand held transmitters in case
you need to retrain the universal transceiver.
Continue to press and hold the universal transceiver
button (A, B or C) while you press and release the hand
held transmitter button until the frequency signal has
been learned. The indicator light (D) will flash slowly
and then rapidly when the programming is successful.
4
NOTE:
Refer to the Rolling Code Programming or the
Canadian/ Gate paragraphs for additional procedures, if
necessary.
• When programming such a garage door opener or
gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
If you do not successfully program the universal trans-
ceiver to learn the signal of your hand held transmitter,
refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or call toll-free for
customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or on the internet
at www.homelink.jci.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Operation
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
Press and hold the desired button (A, B or C) on the
universal transceiver until the garage door or other
device begins to operate. The indicator light (D) shows
that the signal is being transmitted. The hand held
transmitter (E) may also be used at any time.
•
•
Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Code”.
The hand held transmitter appears to program the
universal transceiver but the universal transceiver
does not activate the garage door.
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulty in programming, call toll-free for
customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515, or the internet
at www.homelink.jci.com.
•
Press and hold the programmed button on the univer-
sal transceiver. If the indicator light (D) flashes rapidly
and then stays on after 2 seconds, the device has the
“Rolling Code” feature.
•
If your hand held transmitter appears to program the
universal transceiver, but your garage door or other
device does not operate, and your device was manu-
factured after 1996, your garage door opener or other
device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
“Rolling Code” Programming
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code. Set the universal transceiver by
following these steps:
NOTE:
•
The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 135
NOTE:
•
After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to start
step 3.
3. Return to the universal transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the universal transceiver button
(A, B or C). Press and release the button a second time to
complete the training process. Some garage door openers
may require you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
4
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
universal transceiver. You may use either your universal
transceiver or your original hand held transmitter (E) to
open you garage door.
F21A0121
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the training
button may vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If
you have difficulty in locating the training button, check
your garage door opener manual, or call toll-free for
customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet
at www.homelink.jci.com.
Reprogramming A Signal Button
1. Press and hold the universal transceiver button (A, B
or C) to be reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has
been completed.
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit This will activate the “training” light.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
2. When the indicator light (D) begins to flash slowly
(after 20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter (E)
1 to 3 inches away from the universal transceiver button
to be trained.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The indicator light will begin to flash, first slowly, then
rapidly. When the indicator lights begin to flash rapidly,
release both buttons.
F21A0130
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
1. To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons (A and C) until the indicator
light (D) begins to flash after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 30
seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 137
This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
4
NOTE:
•
The transceiver has been tested and complies with
FCC and DOC/ MDC rules. Changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Break-in recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Ⅵ Fuel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Octane requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Reformulated gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Gasoline/ Oxygenate blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ MMT in gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Sulfur in gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Materials added to fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Adding fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Ⅵ Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ⅵ Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ⅵ Key reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Ⅵ Theft protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Ⅵ Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Ⅵ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Tips for starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Normal conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Flooded engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ At extremely cold ambient temperature . . . . . . 151
Ⅵ Automatic transaxle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Selector lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 STARTING AND DRIVING
▫ Gear positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Recommended downshifting speed . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ⅵ Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ⅵ Brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Ⅵ Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Ⅵ Brake pad wear alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Driving speed
(Vehicles with automatic transaxle) . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Holding on an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Transaxle reset mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ⅵ Automatic transaxle Autostick
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ⅵ Anti-lock braking (ABS) system
▫ Selector lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Selector positions (Main gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Selector positions Manual gate Autostick . . . . . 161
▫ Holding on an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Transaxle reset mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Ⅵ Manual transaxle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ To start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Proper shift points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
(if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ General driving hints
(standard/ anti-lock brakes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Ⅵ Steering wheel tilt lock lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Ⅵ Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Ⅵ Inside Day/ Night rearview mirrors . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Electrochromic inside rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Electrochromic mirror operation
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 141
Ⅵ Cruise/ speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ To activate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ To deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ To resume the set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Ⅵ Traction control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Ⅵ Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Ⅵ Vehicle preparation before driving . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Seat belts and seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Defrosters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Fluid leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Ⅵ Safe driving techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Ⅵ Driving, alcohol and drugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Ⅵ Tips for driving in various conditions. . . . . . . . 199
Ⅵ Operation during cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Warranty Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 STARTING AND DRIVING
BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
FUEL SELECTION
Advanced automobile manufacturing techniques permit
you to operate your new vehicle without experiencing a
long break-in period of low-speed driving.
However, you can add to the future performance and
economy of your vehicle by observing the following
precautions during the first 300 miles (500 km).
It is recommended that you drive your vehicle at mod-
erate speeds during the break-in period.
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gasoline only. It
is equipped with a fuel filler tube especially designed to
accept only the smaller diameter unleaded gasoline dis-
pensing nozzle.
WARNING!
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can
be burned or seriously injured when handling it.
When refueling this vehicle, always turn the engine
off and keep flames, sparks, and smoking materials
away. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
areas.
1. Avoid racing the engine.
2. Avoid harsh driving such as fast starts, sudden accel-
eration, prolonged high-speed driving and abrupt appli-
cation of the brakes. These operations not only have a
detrimental effect on the engine but also cause increased
fuel and oil consumption, which could result in malfunc-
tion of engine components. Be particularly careful to
avoid wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear.
3. Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the seating
capacity. (See “Weights” page 359)
4. Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing during the
break-in period.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 143
3.0 liter engine model
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular grade
unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane rating of 87
[(MON+RON)/ 2], or 91 RON. If optimum performance
is wanted, it is recommended to use premium grade
unleaded gasoline having an octane rating of 91
[(MON+RON)/ 2], or 95 RON.
Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will damage
the engine, catalytic converter, and the oxygen sen-
sors. Further, using leaded gasoline is illegal, and
will void warranty coverage of the engine, catalytic
converter, and oxygen sensors.
MON: Motor Octane Number
RON: Research Octane Number
Gasoline additives
5
Many fuel suppliers add detergents to their gasoline to
minimize fuel injector fouling and to control intake valve
deposits. These detergent gasolines are highly recom-
mended for use in your vehicle. They help keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working
properly.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve
air quality.
Octane requirement
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
2.4 liter engine model
Your vehicle is designed to operate on unleaded gasoline
having a minimum octane rating of 87 [(MON+RON)/ 2],
or 91 RON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 STARTING AND DRIVING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
MMT in Gasoline
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with mate-
rials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and
ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the
country during the winter months to reduce carbon
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygen-
ates may be used in your vehicle.
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage over gasolines of the same octane number that
do not contain MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have
shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission
system performance in some vehicles. DaimlerChrysler
Corporation recommends using gasolines without MMT.
Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
on the pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer
whether or not his/ her gasoline contains MMT.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
ponents.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at higher
levels than allowed in the United States.
Problems that result from using methanol/ gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of DaimlerChrysler Cor-
poration and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does
not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California refor-
mulated gasolines.
Sulfur in Gasoline
If you live in the Northeast United States, your vehicle
may have been designed to meet California low emission
standards with cleaner burning California reformulated
gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 145
states adopting California emission standards, your ve-
hicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting Federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be adversely affected.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have
higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of
the vehicle’s catalytic converter. This may cause the
Check Engine Light to illuminate. The manufacturer
recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded
gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem
is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
Adding Fuel
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door
about 2 inches (50 mm) down from the opening. If fuel is
poured from a portable container, the container should
have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open the
restricting door.
5
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
If the Malfunction Indicator Light (Service Engine
Soon) is flashing, immediate service is required. See
the On Board Diagnostics paragraph in the Mainte-
nance section of this manual.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (“SERVICE ENGINE
SOON”) will come on if the gas cap is not properly
secured. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”) to
turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
WARNING!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
•
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-
ger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 147
FUEL ECONOMY
IGNITION SWITCH
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Your per-
sonal driving habits can have a significant effect on your
fuel economy. Several recommendations for achieving
maximum fuel economy are listed below.
1. When pulling away from traffic lights or stop signs,
accelerate slowly and smoothly.
2. When parked for even a short period, do not idle the
engine. Shut it off.
5
3. Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary stops.
4. Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pres-
sures.
I21A0230
5. For freeway driving, maintain a constant speed within
the posted limits when traffic, roadway and weather
conditions safely permit, for the best fuel economy.
LOCK
For vehicles with a manual transaxle, when removing the
key, push the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it
depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position, and
remove the key.
6. Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle lubricated
according to the recommendations in this manual.
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle: When remov-
ing the key, first set the gear selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then turn the key to “LOCK” and
remove it.
7. Keep your vehicle “tuned-up”.
An out-of-tune engine wastes fuel and costs money.
8. Reduce excess vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE: For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, the key
cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the
“P” (PARK) position.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch while driving. The steering wheel will
lock, causing loss of control.
ACC
Allows operation of electrical accessories with the engine
off.
If the engine is turned off while driving, the
power brake servomechanism will cease to func-
tion and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not function and it
will require greater effort to operate the steering.
START
Engages the starter. After the engine starts, release the
key and it will return automatically to the “ON” position.
•
•
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for a
long time when the engine is not running; doing
so will cause the battery to discharge.
ON
The engine runs and all accessories can be used.
Do not turn the key to the “START” position
when the engine is running; doing so could dam-
age the starter motor.
NOTE: Do not use the “ON” position to operate acces-
sories.
KEY REMINDER CHIME
If the driver’s door is opened while the ignition key is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, a warning chime
sounds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 149
THEFT PROTECTION
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the key to the
؆ACC؆ position to unlock the steering wheel.
Always remove the key from the ignition switch and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lighted
area.
STARTING
Tips for starting
1. Do not operate the starter motor continuously for
longer than 15 seconds at a time; doing so could run
down the battery. If the engine does not start, turn the
ignition switch back to “LOCK”, wait a few seconds, and
then try again.
5
The ignition key can only be removed in the “LOCK”
position. If the key is left in the lock cylinder, a warning
chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Theft-alarm
system, refer to “Theft-alarm system”.
2. If the engine will not start because the battery is weak
or dead, refer to “Jump-starting the engine” section (page
273) for instructions on starting the engine.
STEERING LOCK
Withdraw the key and the steering wheel will be locked.
Turn the steering wheel to confirm that it is locked.
3. The engine is well warmed up if the pointer of the
coolant temperature gauge starts to move. Extended
warm up operation will result in excessive fuel consump-
tion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 STARTING AND DRIVING
Normal conditions
The starting procedure is as follows:
WARNING!
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated
area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle
in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is
odorless, colorless and extremely poisonous, could
build up, and cause serious injury or death.
1. Insert the ignition key and make sure all occupants are
properly seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot.
3. Set the gearshift selector lever (manual transaxle) in
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or the selector lever (au-
tomatic transaxle) in the “P” (PARK) position.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not start the vehicle by pushing or pulling.
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manual transaxle).
Do not run the engine at high rpm or drive the
vehicle at high speed until the engine has had a
chance to warm up.
NOTE: For models equipped with a manual trans-
axle, the starter will not operate unless the clutch
pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock).
•
Release the ignition key as soon as the engine
starts to avoid damaging the starter motor.
5. After turning the ignition key to the “ON” position,
make certain that all warning lights are functioning
properly before starting the engine.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled
fuel injection system that automatically controls fuel
quantity. When starting the engine, there is normally no
need to depress the accelerator pedal.
6. Turn the ignition key to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal, and release the key
when the engine starts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 151
NOTE: Slight noises may be heard on engine start-up.
These noises will disappear as you continue warming up
the engine.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF SO EQUIPPED)
The automatic transaxle is designed for optimum control
and equipped with adaptive control capabilities. The
electronically controlled transaxle optimally matches
gear shifts to almost all driving and road conditions.
Flooded engine
If the engine has become flooded during starting, first
operate the starter for 5 to 6 seconds while fully depress-
ing the accelerator pedal (clear flood), then start the
engine without depressing the accelerator pedal at all.
DRIVING UPHILL
The transaxle may not upshift to a higher gear if the
computer determines the current speed cannot be main-
tained once a higher gear is engaged.
For smoother vehicle performance, if you release the
throttle while climbing a steep grade, the transaxle may
not upshift. This is normal, as the computer is controlling
the shifting. After reaching the top of the hill, normal gear
shift function will resume.
5
At extremely cold ambient temperature
If the engine won’t start, depress the accelerator pedal
about halfway while cranking the engine. Once the
engine starts, release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION!
DRIVING DOWNHILL
When traveling down steep grades and depressing the
brake pedal, the computer may automatically select a
lower gear. This function assists engine braking efforts,
reducing the need to use the brakes.
When starting the engine, make sure that you step on
the brake pedal. During very cold weather, when
you start the engine while putting your foot on the
accelerator pedal, move your foot to the brake pedal
immediately after the engine has started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 STARTING AND DRIVING
Selector lever operation
CAUTION!
As an additional safety precaution, models equipped
with an automatic transaxle have a shift-lock device that
holds the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position. To
move the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position to
another position, follow the steps below.
The electronically controlled transaxle system is
strictly intended to provide supplementary func-
tions. When driving downhill under certain condi-
tions, or immediately after starting when the auto-
matic transaxle is cold, no automatic shift-down may
be made. The driver should shift down to a low gear
(3rd gear or 2nd gear), which will permit the engine
to exert a braking effect.
1. Depress and hold down the brake pedal.
2. Move the selector lever to the desired position.
NOTE: The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to another position if the ignition key is at the
“LOCK” position, removed, or if the brake pedal is not
depressed and held down.
NOTE: During the brake-in period or immediately after
re-connection of the battery cable, the vehicle may not
shift as smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty trans-
mission. The transaxle system must have a short period
to learn parameters for proper shifting. Shifting will
become smooth after the transaxle has been shifted
several times by the electronic control system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 153
WARNING!
Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the
selector lever into a gear from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position. When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
while depressing the accelerator pedal; doing so may
cause the vehicle to “jump” forward or backward.
A
5
CAUTION!
I04A1570
If the button is always depressed to operate the
selector lever, the lever may be accidentally shifted
into the “P”, “R”, 3, 2, “L” position. Be sure not to
depress the button when performing the operations
The indicator panel, on the console located at the
driver’s right, is illuminated for night driving.
Button (A) must be pushed while the brake pedal is
depressed to move the selector lever.
indicated by
in the illustration.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the
shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever
from being moved from the “P” (PARK) position.
Button need not be pushed to move the lever.
Button must be pushed to move the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear positions
WARNING!
“P” PARK
•
Never move the lever to the “N” position while
driving since you could accidentally move the
lever into the ؆P؆ or ؆R؆ position, damaging the
transaxle.
The “P” (PARK) position supplements the parking brake
by locking the transaxle while the vehicle is parked.
The engine can be started in this position.
Apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle in this
position.
•
•
To prevent the vehicle from rolling when stopped
on a slope, the engine should be started in the “P”
(PARK) position, not in “N” (NEUTRAL).
“R” REVERSE
Shift into this position only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal when
the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL), or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL), to maintain
control.
CAUTION!
Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE)
position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is
shifted into the “P” or “R” position while the vehicle
is in motion, the transaxle may be damaged.
“D” DRIVE
This position is used for most city and highway driving.
Engine shifting is done automatically, depending on road
conditions.
“N” NEUTRAL
The engine may be started in this position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 155
“3” THIRD / “2” SECOND
Driving speed (Vehicles with automatic transaxle)
In order to avoid damage to the engine from excessively
high rpm, do not exceed the listed driving speed when
the selector lever is set to the “3” (THIRD) position, the
“2” (SECOND) position or the “L” (LOW) position.
For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
roads where more precise speed control is desired.
Also use it when climbing long grades, and for engine
braking when descending moderately steep grades.
Engine braking is automatically applied when necessary,
depending on road conditions.
Driving speed mph (km/ h)
Condition
2.4 liter engine 3.0 liter engine
“L” LOW
“3” (THIRD)
“2” (SECOND)
“L” (LOW)
114 (180)
74 (115)
28 (45)
118 (190)
80 (130)
31 (45)
This position is for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds when descending steep
gradients.
5
WARNING!
WARNING!
Always obey posted speed limits. Use common
sense and drive safely, regardless of posted speed
limits. Drive at speeds that are safe for the traffic,
weather, or road conditions.
Be very careful not to shift into “L” suddenly. Doing
so may cause the tires to slip.
Holding on an upgrade
To avoid transaxle overheating, never hold the vehicle
stationary on an incline by using the accelerator pedal.
Instead, use the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 STARTING AND DRIVING
Transaxle Reset Mode
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE AUTOSTICK
(IF SO EQUIPPED)
Designed for optimum control and equipped with adap-
tive control capabilities, the electronically controlled
transaxle optimally matches gear shifts to almost all
driving and road conditions.
The transaxle is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could cause damage, the trans-
axle automatically shifts into second gear. The transaxle
remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected.
Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral (N) will continue to
operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven
to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle.
DRIVING UPHILL
The transaxle may not upshift to a higher gear if the
computer determines the current speed cannot be main-
tained once a higher gear is engaged.
If the problem has been momentary, the transaxle can be
reset to regain all forward gears.
For smoother vehicle performance, if you release the
throttle while climbing a steep grade, the transaxle may
not upshift. This is normal, as the computer is controlling
the shifting. After reaching the top of the hill, normal gear
shift function will resume.
•
•
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK (P).
Turn the key to OFF then start the engine.
Shift into “D” and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
When traveling down steep grades and depressing the
brake pedal, the computer may automatically select a
lower gear. This function assists engine braking efforts,
reducing the need to use the brakes.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 157
Selector lever operation
CAUTION!
The electronically controlled transaxle system is
strictly intended to provide supplementary func-
tions. When driving downhill under certain condi-
tions, or immediately after starting when the auto-
matic transaxle is cold, no automatic shift-down may
be made. The driver should shift down to a low gear
(3rd gear or 2nd gear), which will permit the engine
to exert a braking effect.
Main gate
5
NOTE: During the brake-in period or immediately after
re-connection of the battery cable, the vehicle may not
shift smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty transmis-
sion. The transaxle system must have a short period to
learn parameters for proper shifting. Shifting will become
smooth after the transaxle has been shifted several times
by the electronic control system.
Manual gate
I04B0060
The transaxle has 4 forward gears and 1 reverse gear.
The individual gears are selected automatically, depend-
ing on the position of the gear selector lever, the speed of
the vehicle, and the position of the accelerator pedal.
The selector lever has 2 ЉgatesЉ: the main gate and the
manual gate.
NOTE: For information on manual gate operation,
please refer to “Autostick” on page 159.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 STARTING AND DRIVING
A
I04S1580
I04A1430
In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions and
is equipped with a lock button (A) to prevent inad-
vertent selection of the wrong gear.
Button (A) must be pushed while the brake pedal is
depressed to move the selector lever.
Button must be pushed to move the lever.
Button need not be pushed to move the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 159
Indicator lights
WARNING!
Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the
selector lever into a gear from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position. When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
while depressing the accelerator pedal; doing so may
cause the vehicle to “jump” forward or backward.
“
5
CAUTION!
If the button is always depressed to operate the
selector lever, the lever may be accidentally shifted
into the “P”, “R” position. Be sure not to depress the
button when performing the operations indicated by
in the illustration.
I04A3420
A - Selector lever position indicator light
B - “N” indicator light
The indicator lights in the instrument panel are for
indicating the selector lever position (A).
NOTE
:
If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the
shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever
from being moved from the “P” (PARK) position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 STARTING AND DRIVING
If the “N” indicator light in the instrument panel flashes,
there could be a malfunction with the automatic transaxle
system. Identify and take action in accordance with the
following procedures:
2. The “N” indicator light flashes slowly (once per
second) in the “D” or “Autostick” range.
The automatic transaxle safety device may be operating
due to a malfunction.
1. The “N” indicator light flashes rapidly (twice per
second) in the “D” or “Autostick” range.
Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If this occurs, the automatic transaxle fluid is overheat-
ing. Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not turn off
the engine. Move the selector lever to the “P” position
and open the hood. Keep the engine idling.
Selector positions (Main gate)
P - PARK
This position locks the transaxle to prevent the vehicle
from moving. The engine can be started in this position.
After a while, move the selector lever to the “D” or
“Autostick” position and confirm that the “N” indicator
light stops flashing. It is safe to continue driving if the
“N” light no longer flashes.
R - REVERSE
Shift into this position only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Be sure to carry out this check with the selector lever in
the “D” or “Autostick” position. The “N” indicator light
warning function operates only in the “D” or “Autostick”
range.
If the “N” indicator light continues flashing or flashes
intermittently, have your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE)
position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is
shifted into the “P” or “R” position while the vehicle
is in motion, the transaxle may be damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 161
“N” NEUTRAL
Selector positions Manual gate Autostick
The engine may be started in this position.
Autostick is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
WARNING!
•
Never move the lever to the “N” position while
driving since you could accidentally move the
lever into the ؆P؆ or ؆R؆ position, damaging the
transaxle.
5
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, Autostick
is selected by pushing the selector lever from the “D”
position into the manual gate. To return to “D” range
operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate.
•
•
To prevent the vehicle from rolling when stopped
on a slope, the engine should be started in the “P”
(PARK) position, not in “N” (NEUTRAL).
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal when
the vehicle is in “N” (NEUTRAL), or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL), to maintain
control.
In Autostick, gear shifts can be made rapidly by moving
the selector lever backward and forward. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the Autostick allows gear shifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
“D” DRIVE
This position is used for most city and highway driving.
Engine shifting is done automatically, depending on road
conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION!
•
•
Upward shifts do not take place automatically in
Autostick. The driver must execute upward shifts
in accordance with road conditions, make sure the
engine rpm remains below the red zone on the
tachometer.
By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards
(DOWN) twice, it is possible to skip one gear, (i.e.
3rd to 1st or 4th to 2nd). Since sudden engine
de-acceleration or acceleration can cause a loss of
traction, downshifts must be made carefully in
accordance with the vehicle’s speed.
I04S0170
+ (UP) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.
– (DOWN) : Pull the lever backward once to shift down
one gear.
NOTE
1. In Autostick, only the 4 forward gears can be selected.
To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
the “R” or “P” position in the main gate.
2. To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance
and safety, the system may not allow certain gear shifts
when the selector lever is operated, such as 4th gear at
low speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 163
3. In Autostick, downward shifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops,
1st gear is automatically selected.
Indication lights
4. When starting out on slippery roads, push the selector
lever forward into the + (UP) position. This puts the
transmission into 2nd gear and is better for starting out
on slippery roads. Push the selector lever to the –
(DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear.
5
5. Move the selector lever gently between the manual
and main gates and between positions in the manual
gate. Undue force could damage the selector lever.
I04S0530
In Autostick, the currently selected gear is indicated by
the lights on the instrument panel.
NOTE: When Autostick is selected, the “D” indicator
goes off.
Holding on an upgrade
To avoid transaxle overheating, never hold the vehicle
stationary on an incline by using the accelerator pedal.
Instead, use the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 STARTING AND DRIVING
Transaxle Reset Mode
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF SO EQUIPPED)
The transaxle is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could cause damage, the trans-
axle automatically shifts into second gear. The transaxle
remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected.
Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral (N) will continue to
operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven
to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle.
If the problem has been momentary, the transaxle can be
reset to regain all forward gears.
•
•
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK (P).
Turn the key to OFF then start the engine.
Shift into “D” and resume driving.
I29A0020
The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever. Depress
the clutch pedal fully while shifting gears.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
NOTE: During cold weather, shifting may be difficult/
stiff until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is
normal and not a sign of a problem.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 165
To start
2. To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the gearshift
lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, and then shift into
reverse. Never shift into the “R” position when the
vehicle is moving.
Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift into 1st. Then
gradually release the clutch pedal while depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Proper shift points
Always use care to change gears with the vehicle speed
matching the engine speed. Proper shifting will improve
fuel economy and prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
•
Do not move the gearshift lever into the “R”
(REVERSE) while the vehicle is moving forward;
doing so will damage the transaxle.
5
CAUTION!
•
•
•
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal as this
will cause premature clutch wear or damage.
Avoid downshifting that may cause the tachometer
pointer to enter the red zone.
This puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
Do not coast in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
(illegal in many states).
Do not use the gearshift lever as a hand rest. This
can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift
forks.
Upshifting
In order to efficiently utilize your manual transaxle for
both fuel economy and performance, it should be shifted
as listed below.
NOTE
1. If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the clutch pedal
again; the shift will then be easier to make.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 STARTING AND DRIVING
At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle speeds listed
for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions
(relatively steady speeds) will result in increased fuel
economy.
In high altitude locations, it should be upshifted as listed
below.
Condition
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Upshift speeds mph (km/ h)
15 (25)
25 (40)
40 (65)
45 (70)
2.4 liter engine
Condition
Upshift speeds
mph (km/ h)
Acceleration
Cruise
13 (20)
18 (30)
33 (53)
40 (65)
Downshifting
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
15 (25)
23 (35)
34 (55)
43 (70)
It is recommended that you downshift to a lower gear
according to the table as necessary to maintain desired
speeds.
Avoid downshifting at too high a speed; the engine may
suffer damage.
3.0 liter engine
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.
Downshifting is also important to avoid “lugging” the
engine at too low a speed, such as when turning a corner
or when driving up a steep grade.
Condition
Upshift speeds
mph (km/ h)
Acceleration
Cruise
13 (20)
21 (34)
33 (53)
37 (60)
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
15 (25)
23 (35)
34 (55)
43 (70)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 167
Recommended downshifting speed
Possible driving speed
Condition 2.4 liter engine
3.0 liter engine
Downshifting speed
mph (km/ h)
Vehicles with Vehicles with
Condition
205/ 60R16
tire
215/ 50R17
tire
3rd to 2nd
4th to 2nd
5th to 2nd
4th to 3rd
5th to 3rd
Under 20 (30)
1st
2nd
3rd
31 mph
34 mph (55 km/ h)
(50 km/ h)
20 to 30 (30 to 45)
59 mph
(95 km/ h)
55 mph (90 km/ h)
5
Driving precautions
83 mph
86 mph
(140 km/ h)
83 mph
(135 km/ h)
(135 km/ h)
1. The table below indicates the driving speed ranges
that may be driven in each gear without causing the
engine to operate in excessive engine speeds.
4th
114 mph
(185 km/ h)
118 mph (190 km/ h)
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition on,
the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 STARTING AND DRIVING
up on the parking brake lever. Push the release button
and lower the lever fully.
I07A0020
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal and pull
I07A0030
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 169
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle.
BRAKE PEDAL
Excessive use of the brake can cause fading, resulting in
poor brake response and premature wear of brake lin-
ings.
When driving down a long or steep grade, use engine
braking by shifting the transaxle into a lower gear
(manual transaxle and Autostick A/ T) or “3” (THIRD) or
“2” (SECOND) or “L” (LOW) position (except Autostick
A/ T).
WARNING!
•
•
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.
Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
5
WARNING!
Do not leave any objects on the floor near the brake
pedal or permit a floor mat to interfere with the
brake pedal. Doing so could prevent proper depres-
sion of the pedal. Make sure that the pedal can be
operated freely at all times.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 STARTING AND DRIVING
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the
Brake Warning Lamp during brake use.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
•
•
Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep
the engine running whenever the vehicle is in
motion. If the engine is stopped while driving, the
power assist servomechanism will cease to func-
tion and braking efficiency will deteriorate.
POWER BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes as standard
equipment. In the event you lose power assist for any
reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort
required to brake the vehicle will be substantially in-
creased over that required with the power system oper-
ating.
If power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic
systems lose normal capability, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE PAD WEAR ALARM
The disc brakes are equipped with an alarm device that
produces a metallic sound (squeal) when the brake pads
have worn down to the serviceable limit. If you hear this
sound, have the brake pads replaced at an authorized dealer.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 171
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
WARNING!
Driving on worn brake pads can reduce your ability
to stop, and can result in an accident.
General driving hints (standard/anti-lock brakes)
1. During anti-lock braking, steering differs slightly from
normal driving conditions. Be sure to operate steering
wheel carefully.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING (ABS) SYSTEM (IF SO
EQUIPPED)
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock up.
2. The anti-lock braking system is not restricted to situ-
ations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system
may also operate to prevent wheel lock when driving
over manholes, steel roadwork plates, road markings, or
any uneven road surface.
5
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
tires must be properly inflated to produce optimal signals
for the computer. However, the system will compensate
when the compact spare is in use.
3. Always maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front
of you. If your vehicle is equipped with Anti-lock braking
system, allow for a greater braking distance when:
During stops where ABS is activated, a vibration of the
brake pedal may be felt and associated system noises
may be heard.
•
•
•
Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
Driving on uneven road surfaces.
NOTE: Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the
effectiveness of Anti-lock brakes and may lead to an
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION!
•
•
•
Anti-lock braking system can not prevent acci-
dents. It remains the driver’s task to exercise
safety precautions and to drive prudently.
To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking system,
be sure all 4-wheels and tires are the same size
and type (space saver spare excluded).
If the anti-lock brake system warning light illu-
minates after starting the engine or while driving,
it indicates that the anti-lock braking system is
not functioning and that only the normal brake
system is in operation. (The normal brake system
will still function properly.)
I24A1590
NOTE
1. After the vehicle is driven for a while a whining sound
and the sound of a motor operating will be heard from
the engine compartment. These are normal sounds of the
anti-lock braking system performing a self check and do
not indicate a malfunction.
2. The anti-lock braking system becomes operative after
the vehicle has accelerated to a speed over approximately
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 173
6 mph (10 km/ h). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 3 mph (5
km/ h).
STEERING WHEEL TILT LOCK LEVER
Unlock
Lock
5
Wheel speed
sensor
G09A0270
To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tilt lock
lever while raising or lowering the steering wheel to the
desired height.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pulling it
downward.
I24A0060
3. After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow
and ice that may have adhered to the wheel areas. When
doing this be careful not to damage the wheel speed
sensors and cables located at each wheel on vehicles
equipped with an anti-lock braking system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING!
WARNING!
•
•
After adjustment, to the desired height, check to
be sure that the lever is locked.
Never turn off the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Your ability to control the vehicle may be
seriously reduced.
Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while
driving. This can be dangerous.
CAUTION!
POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted steering as
standard equipment. The power assisted steering system
of your vehicle provides mechanical steering capability
in the event power assist is lost.
Do not leave the steering wheel in the fully turned
position. This can cause the power steering pump to
be damaged due to poor lubrication.
If for some reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will observe a substantial increase in
steering effort. Should loss of hydraulic pressure occur
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 175
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT REARVIEW MIRRORS
WARNING!
•
•
Do not attempt to adjust the rearview mirrors
while driving. This can be dangerous.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. The ob-
jects you see in the mirror will look smaller and
farther away than they actually are. Do not use
this mirror to estimate the distance of following
vehicles when changing lanes.
5
I08A0620
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the view through
the rear window. Make this adjustment while the day/
night knob (A) is in the daytime position (1). To reduce
glare from other vehicle’s headlights, switch the lever to
the night position (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 STARTING AND DRIVING
I08A0630
I08A0640
Electrochromic inside rearview mirror (if so
equipped)
When the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,
the green indicator (A) should be illuminated. If not,
press the display switch (C) for more than 6 seconds, less
than 9 seconds, until the indicator illuminates. Now the
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to mini-
mize glare from lights behind you after dark.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 177
To turn off the function, press the display switch (C) more
than 6 seconds, less than 9 seconds. When the green
indicator (A) goes off, the automatic anti-glare will not
function.
To turn the function back on, press the display switch (C)
more than 6 seconds, less than 9 seconds.
NOTE:
•
Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor (B), as
reduced sensitivity could result.
5
Electrochromic mirror operation (if so equipped)
I08A0560
A - Garage door opener button
Press the button to operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, or home lighting. → P.
130
B - Display switch
Press the switch to change the mode of compass,
outside temperature and anti-glare operation. → P.
176.
NOTE: Garage door button must be programmed.
C - Dome light switch → P. 175.
D - Display.
The compass and outside temperature are displayed.
To turn on/ off the display, press the display switch
(C) less than 3 seconds. → P. 177.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 STARTING AND DRIVING
How to change the display mode
1. When the ignition key is “ACC” or “ON” position,
automatic anti-glare operate and current outside tem-
perature and compass are displayed.
The mode will change in order by pressing the display
switch for the following seconds.
I08A0600
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 179
2. If you press the display switch less than 3 seconds, you
can turn on/ off the display.
3. If you press the display switch more than 3 seconds,
less than 6 seconds, you can alternate the temperature
reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius. → P. 180.
5
I08A0660
I08A0590
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 STARTING AND DRIVING
4. If you press the display switch more than 6 seconds,
less than 9 seconds, you can turn on/ off the automatic
anti-glare. → 175
5. If you press the display switch more than 9 seconds,
less than 12 seconds, you can adjust for compass vari-
ance. →181
I08A0670
I08A0610
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 181
6. If you press the display switch more than 12 seconds,
Outside temperature (if so equipped)
you can recalibrate compass variance. →184
5
I08A0600
I08A0590
When the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,
the current outside temperature is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 STARTING AND DRIVING
To alternate the temperature reading between
Fahrenheit and Celsius
NOTE
•
•
The outside temperature can be displayed from
-40°F (-40°C)
If the outside temperature is below -40°F (-40°C) or
over 140°F (60° C) an error message “SC” or “OC”
will be shown in the display. If an error message
(“SC” or “OC”) will be shown in the display, have
the system checked at an authorized dealer.
•
•
If the outside temperature drops below about 37°F
(3°C)
The outside temperature displayed may differ from
the actual temperature on account of surrounding
conditions, driving conditions, etc.
I08A0590
Press the display switch above 3 seconds, less than 6
seconds until the display blinks °F and °C.
Press the display switch to toggle between the Fahrenheit
and Celsius readings within 5 seconds.
After 5 seconds of inactivity, the original item (Outside
temperature/ Compass) is again displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 183
Compass operation
and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
magnetic variation of compass, your compass could give
false readings.
To adjust for magnetic variation of compass
1. Press the display switch more than 9 seconds, less than
12 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the
display.
5
I08A0600
When the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,
the vehicle’s current directional heading (N, NE, E, SE, S,
SW, W and NW) will be displayed.
Magnetic variation of compass
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
magnetic variation of compass. Magnetic variation of
compass is the difference between earth’s magnetic north
I08A0610
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 STARTING AND DRIVING
2. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the zone map.
NOTE
•
•
•
Do not attach ski racks, antennas, or any other object
to the vehicle by means of a magnet. Such magnets
will affect the operation of the compass.
If the compass deviates from the correct indication
soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass
checked at an authorized dealer.
The compass may not indicate the correct compass
point in the places shown below:
•
•
Vehicles in tunnels or parked in buildings
Expressways, near railroads, underneath railroad
cables, or over subways
D11C0690
•
Near transformer stations or high voltage power
lines
3. Press the display switch until the new zone number
appears in the display. After 5 seconds of inactivity, the
original item (Outside temperature/ Compass) displayed
again.
In these cases, the correct direction will be displayed once
the vehicle returns to a place where the earth’s magnetic
field is stable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 185
To calibrate the compass
If the display reads “CAL” (A), there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the compass. In this case,
the compass may need calibration.
5
I08A0650
D11C0110
If the “CAL” is displayed, drive the vehicle in a circle at
about 5 mph (8km/ h) or less until the “CAL” goes off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 STARTING AND DRIVING
If the “CAL” is not displayed, but compass calibration is
required, press and hold the display switch for 12 sec-
onds, or until “CAL” is displayed. With “CAL” dis-
played, drive the vehicle in a circle at less than 5mph
(8km/ h) or less until the “CAL” goes off.
Electric remote-controlled outside mirrors
Cleaning of the mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
I08B2160
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted when the
ignition key is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
Place the lever to the same side as the mirror whose
adjustment is desired:
L - Left outside mirror adjustment
R - Right outside mirror adjustment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 187
NOTE
After adjustment, return the lever to the centered
position.
CRUISE/SPEED CONTROL
•
Press the left, right, up or down switches to adjust the
mirrors as desired.
1. Up
2. Down
3. Right
4. Left
5
I10A1190
Cruise/ speed control is an automatic speed control sys-
tem. It lets you keep the same driving speed. Cruise/
speed control can be used at 25mph (40km/ h) or more. It
is especially useful for freeway driving. Cruise/ speed
control does not work at speeds below about 25mph
(40km/ h).
A - Main switch
B - Cruise/ speed control lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 STARTING AND DRIVING
•
Your speed may increase to more than the set speed
on a steep downhill. You must use the brake to
control your speed. If your speed increases too
much, turn off the cruise/ speed control. (Refer to
the section “To deactivate” on page 190.)
CAUTION!
• For safety reasons, the main switch (A) should be
set to the OFF position when you are not using the
cruise/speed control system.
• Cruise/speed control is not recommended when
driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the
same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, or slip-
pery, or on a steep downhill.
To activate
1. Momentarily push in the main switch (A) at the end of
the cruise/ speed control lever.
• For vehicles with manual transaxles, if you shift to
“N” (Neutral) in cruise/speed control mode with-
out pressing the clutch first, the engine will run
too fast and might be damaged.
NOTE
•
•
Cruise/ speed control may not be able to keep your
speed on uphills or downhills.
Your speed may drop on a steep uphill. You must
use the accelerator if you want to stay at your set
speed.
I10A1490
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 189
2. When the main switch (A) is ON, the “CRUISE”
control light on the instrument cluster will illuminate.
3. Pull the lever (B) down while driving at the desired
speed.
5
I10A1670
I10A1500
To increase the set speed
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 STARTING AND DRIVING
Cruise/speed control lever
Accelerator
I10A1530
I10A1550
Pull the cruise/ speed control lever up and hold it. Your
speed will then gradually increase. When you reach your
desired speed, release the switch. Your cruising speed is
now set.
Press the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed.
Pull the cruise/ speed control lever down for a moment,
then release it.
To decrease the set speed
To increase your speed in small amounts, pull the cruise/
speed control lever up for less than 1 second and release
it. Each time you pull the lever up, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6km/ h) faster.
There are 2 ways to reduce the set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 191
Cruise/speed control lever
Brake pedal
5
I10A1540
I10A1110
Pull the cruise/ speed control lever down and hold it
while driving at the set speed, and you will slow down
(coast) gradually. When your desired low speed is
reached, release the lever.
Press the brake pedal (which disengages the cruise/
speed control), then pull the cruise/ speed control lever
down momentarily to set a new desired cruise speed.
To slow down in small amounts, press the cruise/ speed
control lever down for less than 1 second and release it.
Each time you press the lever down, your vehicle will
slow down by about 1 mph (1.6km/ h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 STARTING AND DRIVING
To accelerate for passing
To deactivate
I10A1520
I10A1510
Press the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When
you release the pedal, the cruise/ speed control will
return to your set speed.
The cruise/ speed control can be turned off as follows:
1. Push the main switch (A) at the end of the lever (Main
switch OFF).
2. Pull the cruise/ speed control lever (B) toward you.
The cruise/ speed control can be turned off automatically
in any of the following ways:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 193
3. By slightly tapping the brake pedal or pressing down
on it to slow your speed.
To resume the set speed
4. By pressing the clutch pedal down (for vehicles with
manual transaxle).
5. By moving the selector lever to “N” (for vehicles with
automatic transaxle).
6. When your speed slows to 10 mph (15km/ h) or more
below the set speed because of a hill, etc.
5
7. When your speed slows to 25mph (40km/ h) or less.
WARNING
I10A1530
•
For vehicles with automatic transaxles, although
the cruise/speed control can be turned off by
moving the selector lever to the “N” position,
never move the selector lever to the “N” position
while driving. You would have no engine braking
and could cause a serious accident.
If the speed memory has not been erased, resume the
previously set speed by pulling the cruise/ speed control
lever up while driving at a speed of 25 mph (40km/ h) or
higher.
Under either of the following conditions, however, using
the switch does not allow you to resume the previously
set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 STARTING AND DRIVING
procedure:
Driving hints
(1) The ignition key is turned OFF.
(2) The main switch is turned OFF.
1. Traction control system does not actively apply brakes.
Always decelerate the vehicle sufficiently before entering
corners or bends.
TRACTION CONTROL (IF SO EQUIPPED)
On slippery surfaces, traction control system prevents the
drive wheels (front wheels) from excessive spinning,
during starting or while accelerating in turns on slippery
roads.
2. On snowy or icy roads, drive slowly using tire chains
or snow tires.
3. Never mix or use tires of different size since the
traction control system could function incorrectly and
make safe driving difficult.
NOTE
•
•
The traction control system functions at speeds
below about 25mph (40km/ h).
Some vibration will be felt in the vehicle body and a
whining sound of a motor will be heard from the
engine compartment when the traction control sys-
tem functions. This is a normal result of the traction
control system operation, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 195
Warning light
CAUTION
• If the warning light illuminates, a malfunction
may have occurred in the system.
When this happens, have your vehicle checked at an
authorized dealer.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter.
5
Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con-
verter does not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper converter operation and prevent damage.
I26A1290
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the warning
light illuminate and go out after a few seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 STARTING AND DRIVING
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of an engine malfunction, particularly one
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Prolonged operation of your vehicle while it is
overheated may result in damage to the converter
and vehicle.
1. Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of the type rec-
ommended in “Fuel selection”.
2. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could damage the catalytic converter.
3. Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
4. Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle. If the battery is weak or discharged, use jumper
cables to properly start the engine.
WARNING!
5. Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when performing
diagnostic tests.
•
•
Do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire
could occur.
6. Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods if it is
idling roughly or otherwise obviously malfunctioning.
Undercoating should not be applied to the cata-
lytic converter.
7. To prevent the catalytic converter from being dam-
aged due to unburned gas, do not race the engine when
turning off the ignition switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 197
8. Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance
is noticeably less, or that there is unnecessary engine
miss, or any other engine trouble, such as with the
ignition, etc. If it is impractical to stop driving immedi-
ately, reduce the speed and drive for only a short time.
Have an inspection made by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Seat belts and seats
1. Before starting the vehicle, make certain that you and
all your passengers are seated and properly wearing the
seat belts (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate
restraints), and that all doors are locked.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible, while still
maintaining good visibility, and good control of the steering
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. Examine the instru-
ment panel indicators for any possible malfunction.
9. In an unusual event of a severe engine malfunction, a
scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal cata-
lytic converter overheating. If this occurs, the vehicle
should be stopped in a safe place, the engine shut off and
the vehicle allowed to cool. Once the engine is cool, the
vehicle should immediately be taken to a dealer for
service.
5
3. Have the front passenger adjust their seat as far
rearward as possible.
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defroster mode and set
the blower switch for high speed operation. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
(See “Heater / Air conditioning” page 232.)
VEHICLE PREPARATION BEFORE DRIVING
Before starting on a trip, perform the following checks to
obtain the greatest possible enjoyment and safety from
your vehicle:
Tires
Examine all tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 STARTING AND DRIVING
Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires (including spare
tire) for proper pressure. Maintain specified tire inflation
pressures. Replace tires before they are excessively worn.
SAFE DRIVING TECHNIQUES
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and your safest
driving, cannot guarantee that you can avoid accident or
injury. However, we recommend that you give extra
attention to the following, to help maximize the safety of
you and your passengers:
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights
while you activate the controls. Check the turn signals
and highbeam indicators on the instrument panel.
1. Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road and
weather conditions. Leave adequate stopping distance
for your vehicle.
Fluid leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking
for fuel, water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Make sure all fluid
levels are at the proper levels. Also, if fuel leaks are
detected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
2. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors and flash
the proper turn-signal light.
3. While driving, watch the behavior of other drivers,
bicyclists and pedestrians.
Driver
4. During an emergency stop, switch on the hazard
warning flasher.
Do not drive if you are tired or sleepy. Do not drive if you
have been drinking or taking drugs. Unless you are alert
and able to concentrate on your driving, you could have
an accident, resulting in serious or fatal injury to yourself
and others.
5. When leaving the vehicle, set the parking brake and
place the gearshift lever into low gear.
In vehicles with an automatic transaxle, place the selector
lever in the “P” (PARK) position. Remove the key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 199
6. Always obey applicable laws and regulations. Be a
courteous and alert driver.
Always leave room for unexpected events, such as sud-
den braking.
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect
your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult
with your doctor or pharmacist.
WARNING!
7. Never drive when you are sleepy or fatigued. Never
drive under the influence of alcohol, drugs, or medica-
tion.
NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Your perceptions are less, your reflexes slower and
your judgment impaired.
8. Never leave the engine running while you take a short
sleep/ rest. Leaving the engine running while sleeping
risks injury or death from accidentally moving the gear-
shift lever or the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in
the passenger compartment.
5
WARNING!
Driving after drinking alcohol can lead to an acci-
dent. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes
are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking.
DRIVING, ALCOHOL AND DRUGS
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public
transportation. Drinking coffee, or taking a cold shower,
will not make you sober.
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS CONDITIONS
1. Your front bumper fascia may become damaged if you
do not stop your vehicle prior to the bumper extending
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 STARTING AND DRIVING
over curbs or parking stop blocks. Always use caution
when traveling up or down sharp inclines as your
bumper may contact the road surface.
WARNING!
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas. Any
spark or flame can cause the battery to explode,
which could seriously injury or kill you.
Always wear protective clothes and a face shield
when doing battery maintenance, or let a skilled
technician do it.
2. Maintain specified tire inflation pressures. Replace
tires before they are excessively worn.
3. If you plan to drive in another country, comply with
the vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel.
2. Manual transaxles may be more difficult to shift
during cold weather operation. This is normal and shift
effort will become easier as the transaxle reaches a
normal operating temperature.
Maintain low-speed operation at first to allow the trans-
axle oil to be distributed to all lubrication points.
OPERATION DURING COLD WEATHER
1. Check the battery, including terminals and cables.
During extremely cold weather, the battery capacity will
decrease. Also, the battery power level may drop because
more power is needed for cold starting and operation.
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if the engine runs
at the proper speed and if the headlights are at their usual
intensity. Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
During cold weather, it is possible that a discharged
battery could freeze.
3. Check the engine antifreeze.
If there is a shortage of coolant due to leakage or engine
overheating, add high-quality ethylene glycol antifreeze
and water. The recommended ratio is about 50% water
and 50% anti-freeze. This ratio provides adequate corro-
sion, boiling, and freeze protection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND DRIVING 201
The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of the
tow vehicle load capacity when loading the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never open the radiator cap when the radiator is hot.
You could be seriously burned.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing. Fluid discoloration, or a burnt odor,
shows the need for transmission fluid replacement.
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING!
Warranty Requirements
The Manufacturer’s Passenger Vehicle Warranty will
apply to vehicles used to tow trailers for non-commercial
use. However the following conditions must be met:
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake lines can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
5
•
•
•
•
The maximum trailer load for vehicles with manual
transaxles is 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
The maximum trailer load for vehicles with automatic
transaxles is 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are recom-
mended for motoring safety.
The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed
20 square feet (1.86 square meters).
If using a manual transaxle vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive
clutch slippage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 STARTING AND DRIVING
Weight limits
I26A1290
Never exceed the maximum trailer weight (A), maximum
tongue weight (B), Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ To adjust the sun visor position . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Ⅵ Accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Ⅵ Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Ⅵ Accessory boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Center console with lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Trunk net (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Ⅵ Electronic digital clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Clock setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Ⅵ General information about your radio . . . . . . . 214
▫ Signal transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Weak reception (fading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Reflections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Cross modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ FM stereo reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Causes of disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Ⅵ Whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
6
Ⅵ AM Stereo & FM Stereo Radio With Graphic
Equalizer, Cassette Tape Player And CD Player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 217
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ AM/ FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ To Set The Radio Pushbutton Memory . . . . . . 219
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . 219
▫ Tape Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Operation Instructions—CD Player . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ FF/ Tune/ RW Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Tape / CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Ⅵ Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 222
Ⅵ AM/ FM Stereo Radio With 4 Disc CD Changer
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 223
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 205
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ MODE Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ PTY (Program Type) Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ To Set The Pushbutton Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . 225
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Instructions — CD Changer . . . . . . 225
▫ Inserting the Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ FF / Tune/ RW Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Random Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Radio/ CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Loading The CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Removing Discs From The CD Changer . . . . . 227
Ⅵ Steering wheel remote control switches (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ How to adjust the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ To listen to the audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ To listen to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Automatic tuning the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ To select the preset memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ To listen to a tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ To listen to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Handling of compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Ⅵ Radio operation and cellular phones . . . . . . . . 232
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Ⅵ Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Air flow rate and direction adjustments . . . . . . 233
Ⅵ Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Changing the blower speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Changing the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Changing mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Changing air selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Air conditioning switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ How to use the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Defrosting or defogging of the windshield
and door windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Important operation tips for air conditioning . . 245
▫ Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ During a long period of disuse . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Ⅵ Installation of accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 207
SUN VISORS
To adjust the sun visor position
1. Remove the holder (A) from the hook (B), then move
the sunvisor to the window.
2. Slide the sun visor and adjust the position.
6
G10A0260
1. To reduce front glare.
2. To reduce side glare.
G10A0550
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is on the back of the sun visor.
G10A0580
WARNING!
G13A0850
•
Do not attempt to adjust the sun visor while
driving. This can be dangerous.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 209
ACCESSORY SOCKET
6
G13A0840
G38A0710
Two accessory sockets are provided in the center console.
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, insert it in the socket.
The accessory socket (A) can be operated when the
ignition key is in the “ON” or “ACC” positions. This
socket can also be used for a lighter when an optional
smokers kit is ordered from your dealer.
The accessory socket (B) is a direct feed from the battery
so it can be operated whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
CUP HOLDER
CAUTION!
•
Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory operat-
ing on 12V and at 120W or less.
Extended use of electronic equipment with the
engine off may run down the battery.
•
•
When the accessory socket is not in use, be sure to
close the socket cap. This will prevent the socket
from becoming clogged and short circuiting.
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
FRONT SEAT
The front holder (A) can be used to accept an ash receiver
when an optional smokers kit is purchased from your
dealer. The rear holders (B) are provided for use as
cupholders.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 211
ACCESSORY BOXES
CAUTION!
Do not drink beverages while driving the vehicle;
doing so could distract you and result in an accident.
6
G14A0840
Convenient storage space is located throughout the ve-
hicle.
1. Door pockets
G34H0870
2. Center console
REAR SEAT
Cup holders are provided at each side for the rear
passengers.
3. Center accessory box
4. Glove compartment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Glove compartment
WARNING!
Unlock
An open glove compartment door can result in
serious injury to the front passenger in an accident,
even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Al-
ways keep the glove compartment door closed when
driving.
Lock
NOTE: If the glove compartment is opened, the glove
compartment light illuminates.
G14B1120
To open the glove compartment, pull the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 213
Center console with lid
Trunk net (if so equipped)
6
G14C0430
G17E0270
Small articles can be stored in center console.
To open the center console, pull up on the front of the lid.
Attach the net to hooks according to the illustration. Keep
the net stored in the trunk so it can be used at any time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR RADIO
FM AM
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout indicates the time in hours
and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
Clock setting procedure
1. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press either the hour (H) or minute (M) buttons on the
radio. The time setting will increase each time you press
the button.
25 to 40 mile radius
(40 to 64 Km)
100 mile radius
(160 Km)
2. Press any other button to exit from the clock setting
mode.
H12G0010
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to the radio,
because the vehicle moves, and reception conditions are
constantly changing. Buildings, terrain, signal distance
and noise from other vehicles are all working against
good reception.
Please read the following information regarding radio
reception, especially those regarding stereo transmission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 215
Signal transmission
Reflections
FM signals do not follow the earth’s surface nor are they
reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, FM
broadcasts cannot be received over long distances.
AM signals follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM broadcasts
can be received over longer distances.
Weak reception (fading)
Because of the limited range of FM transmissions and the
way FM waves spread, fading usually occurs with FM
reception.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains or similar
obstructions, reception disturbance may result.
6
H12G0020
The reason why one can hear FM but not AM in parking
garages, under bridges etc., is that FM signals unlike AM
signals, are reflected by solid objects such as buildings,
etc.
Because FM signals are easily reflected by buildings, this
can also cause reception disturbances.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
The direct signal from the broadcast station reaches the
antenna slightly before the reflected signal. This time
difference may cause some reception disturbance or
flutter.
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a very high broadcast signal
quality. This means that disturbances mentioned previ-
ously become more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo reception.
This typically occurs in urban areas.
Causes of disturbances
Cross modulation
H12G0040
H12G0030
FM can be affected by electrical systems of vehicles in the
vicinity, especially those without electronic noise sup-
pression for the ignition system. The disturbance is even
greater if the station is weak or poorly tuned.
If one listens to a weak station and is in the vicinity of
another strong station, both stations might be received
simultaneously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 217
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical disturbances
as AM. AM reception is sensitive to electrical distur-
bances such as power lines, lightning and other types of
similar electrical phenomena.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to remove the whip antenna
before going into an automatic vehicle wash or
passing under places with a low height clearance.
WHIP ANTENNA
AM STEREO & FM STEREO RADIO WITH
GRAPHIC EQUALIZER, CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER
AND CD PLAYER (IF SO EQUIPPED)
6
H11A3220
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
To remove the whip antenna, turn it counterclockwise.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Power Switch, Volume Control
Fade
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
Graphic Equalizer
The graphic equalizer has 3 separate bands. Each is
controlled by a slider control with a detent at the mid
position. Moving a control up or down increases or
decreases amplification of the band.
AM/FM Selection
Tuning
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5
seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the
next.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in.
Pressing the AM/ FM button continues the search in the
alternate frequency band.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 219
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
To Set The Radio Pushbutton Memory
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
6
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
Tape Player Operation
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Seek Button
Tape Eject
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage
and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press the TIME button. The lighted arrow
in the display window will show the new direction.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
Rewind (RW)
Pinch Roller Release
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
If ignition power or the radio ON/ OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 221
Noise Reduction
The Dolby noise reduction system* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the
disc. The display will show the track number and index
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
To turn off the Dolby noise reduction system: Press the
NR button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR
light in the display will go off when the Dolby NR
System is off. The Dolby NR System is automatically
reactivated each time a tape is inserted.
Seek Button
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within
the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
*Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
6
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Operation Instructions — CD Player
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the
radio mode.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio will remain in the Radio mode.
Inserting The Compact Disc
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the CD symbol then the time
of day will be displayed.
FF/TUNE/RW Button
Press the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player
will fast forward through the tracks until the button is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
released. Press the RW (Rewind) button and the CD
player will reverse through the tracks until the button is
released.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
Press the SEEK UP button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
Tape /CD Button
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape
player.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Time Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day.
Scan Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 223
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH 4 DISC CD
CHANGER (IF SO EQUIPPED)
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
6
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Power Switch, Volume Control
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Tone Control
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
The unit has 2 separate controls for bass and treble. Each
is controlled by a slider control with a detent at the mid
position. Moving a control up or down increases or
decreases amplification of the band.
MODE Selection
Press the MODE button to change from AM, FM to CD
changer and Sirius (Satellite radio) – if equipped. A CD
may remain in the player while in the Satellite mode. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
PTY (Program Type) Selection
Displays program type in Satellite radio (if equipped)
mode only.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5 seconds
at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To
stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 225
To Set The Pushbutton Memory
General Information
When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit
to push-button memory, press the SET button. SET 1 will
show in the display window. Select the push-button you
wish to lock onto this station and press and release that
button. If a station is not selected within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play
but will not be locked into push-button memory.
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
6
Operating Instructions — CD Changer
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Inserting the Compact Disc
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF the time of day will be displayed. If the volume
control is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
will show the track number and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
button to go back to the beginning of the track. Press
button for a second time to stop Random Play.
Seek Button
Radio/CD Button
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection.
Press this button to select between CD player and radio.
Time Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of the day.
FF /TUNE/ RW Button
Press the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player
will fast forward through the tracks until the button is
released.
Scan Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
Random Play
Loading the CD Changer
The CD changer has one load/ eject button located on the
right side of the faceplate, and 4 disc position buttons.
Press the button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. The CD changer stays in the random
mode when changing to the next disc.
1. Select the desired disc position.
2. Wait for the green READY light to stop flashing.
3. Gently insert the CD at a slight downward angle.
NOTE: The changer will not random play between
discs.
4. Press the next disc position and proceed to load
additional CD’s.
Press the top of the SEEK button once to move to the next
randomly selected track. Press the bottom of the SEEK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 227
Playing Discs
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCHES (IF SO EQUIPPED)
The radio display indicates the CD number (the slot
where the CD is loaded), and the current track being
played at the time.
If more than one CD is loaded in the CD changer, it
automatically plays the next CD after playing the last
track of the current CD. If there is only one CD loaded, it
will automatically return to the first track of the CD. To
play any available disc select the desired disc position
button.
6
Removing Discs from the CD Changer
1. Press the load/ eject button then press the desired disc
position button to eject that CD.
H12D0070
2. The display will flash the disc number that is being
ejected.
These switches can be used when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
3. If the disc is not removed from the unit within 15
seconds the disc will automatically re-load.
1. Seek up / Fast forward APS button / Track up button
2. Volume up button
3. Preset change / Disc up button
4. Mode change button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
5. Seek down / Rewind APS button / Track down button
6. Volume down button
To listen to the radio
To select AM/FM mode
Mode change button - 4
NOTE:
• Do not push two or more of the steering wheel
Select the desired band (AM or FM) by pressing this
button.
remote control switches at the same time.
How to adjust the volume
Automatic tuning the radio
Volume up button - 2
Seek up button - 1
The volume will increase when this button is pressed.
Volume down button - 6
Seek down button - 5
After pressing these buttons, release the buttons, and
reception of the selected station will begin.
The volume will decrease when this button is pressed.
To select the preset memory
Preset change button - 3
To listen to the audio system
Select the desired mode by lightly pressing the Mode
change button (4). Every time the button is pressed, the
mode can be changed.
When the radio is on and this button is pressed, the
preset station frequencies are sequentially selected each
time the button is pressed; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1, 2 etc.
Radio (AM) → Radio (FM) → Tape → CD
NOTE:
• Tape or CD mode cannot be selected unless a tape or
CD is in the slot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 229
To listen to a tape
To listen to a CD
To operate the APS (Automatic Program Sensor)
system
To select CD mode
Mode change button - 4
The start of each song on a prerecorded music tape can be
found by using the Fast forward APS button (1) or
Rewind APS button (5). As many as 7 programs can be
skipped over in this manner.
Select the desired mode (CD player mode or CD au-
tochanger mode) by pressing this button.
To select a desired track
Track up button - 1
Fast forward APS operation:
Press this button until the desired track is reached.
Track down button - 5
Press the APS button (1) to the number of songs you
desire to skip over. The frequency-display window will
display the number songs selected. The tape will be
fast-forwarded to the start of the song, and playback will
begin.
6
Press this button until the desired track is reached.
The frequency display window will display the number
of tracks selected.
Rewind APS operation:
To select a desired disc (CD autochanger only)
Disc up button - 3
Press the APS button (5) to the number of the selection
you desire to skip over including the one now being
played. The frequency-display window will display the
number of songs selected. The tape will be rewind to the
start of the song, and playback will begin.
Press this button until the desired disc is reached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Handling of Compact Discs
H12F0180
(1) Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark
shown in the illustration above. (Playback of CD-R
discs may cause problems. CD-RW discs cannot be
played).
(2) The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs
(like cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like
warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those
shown below will damage the CD player.
H12F0172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 231
(3) In the following circumstances, moisture can form on
compact discs and inside the audio system, prevent-
ing normal operation.
•
•
When there is high humidity (for example, when it
is raining).
When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right
after the heater is turned on in cold weather.
In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to
dry out.
6
(4) When the CD player is subjected to violent vibra-
tions, such as during off-road driving, the tracking
may not work.
H12F0190
(6) Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there
isn’t a label. This will damage the disc surface and
could affect the sound quality. When handling a
compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and
the center hole.
(5) When storing compact discs, always store them in
their separate cases. Never place compact discs in
direct sunlight, or in any place where the temperature
or humidity is high.
(7) To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe
directly from the center hole toward the outer edge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such
as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an
anti-static agent on the disc.
compact disc that has stickiness or other contamina-
tion left by a peeled-off label, or sticker. If you use
such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working
properly and you may not be able to eject the
compact disc.
(8) Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to
write on the label surface of the disc.
CD player laser warning
WARNING!
Operating the CD player in a manner other than
specifically instructed herein may result in hazard-
ous radiation exposure.
Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the
CD player by yourself. There are no user serviceable
parts inside. In case of malfunction, contact an
authorized dealer.
H12F0160
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
(9) Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers (B) on
compact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on
which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 233
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.
Air flow rate and direction adjustments
Center and side vents
VENTS
6
H16A3660
H16A3610
1. Center vents
2. Side vents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Change the direction of the airflow from side to side by
moving the knob (A). Change the vertical direction of the
air flow up and down by pushing the top button edge of
the vents.
AIR CONDITIONING
Control panel
NOTE: On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
air-conditioned vehicle may look like fog. This is moist
air suddenly cooled and there is no abnormality in the air
conditioning system.
6
H23A2840
1. Blower switch
2. Air conditioning switch
3. Temperature control dial
4. Mode selection dial
5. Air selection switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 235
Changing the blower speed
Changing the temperature
6
H23A2860
H23A2870
The blower may be operated (when the ignition key is in
the ON position) at 4 different speeds. Select the best
speed to fit your needs. When the blower switch is set to
the ‘‘O’’ position, all air conditioning functions will stop.
Select the desired temperature level by turning the tem-
perature control dial either clockwise or counterclock-
wise. Turning the temperature control dial clockwise
makes the air warmer.
NOTE: When the engine coolant temperature is low, the
temperature of air introduced into the passenger com-
partment does not change even if the temperature control
dial is moved to the high temperature side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Changing mode selection
Face position
H03I0670
To change air flow to the different outlets, turn the mode
selection dial to the desired position.
H13D0543
Air flows exclusively to the upper part of the passenger
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 237
Foot/face position
NOTE: Air flows mostly to the upper part of the pas-
senger compartment with the dial within position (1),
and flows mostly to the leg area with the dial within
position (2).
6
H13D0553
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment and flows to the leg area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Foot position
Foot/defroster position
H13D0563
H13D0573
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Air flows to the leg area, windshield, and door windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 239
NOTE: Air flows mostly to the leg area with the dial
within position (1), and flows mostly to the windshield
with the dial within position (2).
Defroster position
6
H13D0583
Air flows exclusively to the windshield and door win-
dows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
NOTE: When the mode selection dial is set to the “
”
remove fog or frost from the windshield.
When air conditioning is selected, the air selection will be
controlled automatically for optimum performance.
When the air conditioning is turned off, the air selection
will be set to the outside position.
or “
” position, the air conditioning compressor will
operate automatically. The outside air position will also
be selected automatically. (In this case, the air condition-
ing indicator will not change.) This is done for optimum
performance.
The air selection indicator will show the selected posi-
tion.
Changing air selection
If desired, you can change the air selection. Every time
the air selection switch is pushed, the mode for “outside”
(Indicator OFF) and “recirculation” (Indicator ON) will
alternate.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside
air is dusty or otherwise contaminated, use the “recircu-
lation” position. Although, switch to the outside position
periodically to prevent window fog up.
CAUTION!
Using the “recirculation” position for extended time
periods causes the windows to fog up.
H23A2880
Normally use the “outside” position to keep the wind-
shield and side windows clear and, also to quickly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 241
Air conditioning switch
CAUTION!
When using the air conditioning, the idle speed is
slightly increased. Therefore, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal when shifting the trans-
mission to drive.
For the 3.0 liter engine model, if the air conditioning
indicator (A) blinks, it is suspected that something is
wrong with the air conditioning. Move the vehicle to
a safe place and stop the engine. Then run the engine
again and see the air conditioning indicator (A). If
the indicator goes out, there is nothing wrong with
the air conditioning. If it blinks again, have the
system checked by the authorized dealer.
6
H23A3260
The air conditioning can be operated while the engine is
running.
Push the switch and the air conditioning (cooling/
dehumidifying function) will operate. When “ON”, the
operation indicator lamp (A) will illuminate.
Push the switch again and the air conditioning will stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
How to use the controls
Heating
Defrosting or defogging of the windshield and
door windows
CAUTION!
For safety, make sure you have a clear view through
all windows before driving.
To remove frost or fog from the windshield and door
windows, use the mode selection dial (“
” or “
”).
H03B0710
Set the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration and set the air selection switch (A) to the
“outside” position.
Adjust the temperature by turning the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise. Select the desired blower speed.
H03H0320
NOTE: When maximum heating is needed, set the
blower speed to the fourth position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 243
To keep the windshield and door windows defogged,
and to keep leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).
For quick defrosting
1. Set the mode selection dial to the
position.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the
position.
2. Adjust the blower to the maximum blower speed.
2. Adjust the blower to the desired speed.
3. Set the desired temperature.
3. Adjust the temperature control to the maximum tem-
perature.
NOTE
1. When the mode selection dial is set to the “
”
or “ ” position, the air conditioning compressor will
6
operate automatically. The outside air position will also
be selected automatically. (In this case, the air condition-
ing indicator will not change.)
2. While in “
” or “
” position, you cannot turn the
air conditioning off or select the recirculation position.
This ensures that the windows will not fog up.
3. To defog effectively, direct the air flow from the side
vents toward the door windows.
H03D1500
4. When defrosting, do not set the temperature control
dial around the max. cool position. Cool air will blow
against the window glass and fog it up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
Combination of unheated air and heated air
Cooling
H03C0680
H04F0970
Set the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration and set the air selection switch (A) to the
outside position.
The air will be directed to the leg area and the upper part
of the passenger compartment. Select the desired blower
speed.
Set the mode selection dial to the “
the illustration.
Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position and
push the air conditioning switch (B).
” position shown in
1. Setting for ordinary cooling
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly
warm air flows to the upper part of the passenger
compartment.
2. Setting for cooling the leg area
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOR PLEASANT DRIVING 245
Adjust the temperature by turning the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise or counterclockwise.
Select the desired blower speed.
Important operation tips for air conditioning
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever possible.
Parking under the hot sun makes the vehicle interior
extremely hot, which requires more time to cool the
interior. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the
windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning
operation to expel hot air.
2. Close the windows when the air conditioning is in use.
The entry of outside air through open windows will
reduce cooling efficiency.
6
3. When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
which is located in front of the windshield, is free of
obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the
plenum water drains.
H04F0980
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant
recommendations
If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the
cause might be a refrigerant leak.
NOTE: If the outside air is dusty or otherwise contami-
nated, or if maximum cooling performance is desired, set
air selection switch (A) to the recirculation position and
the temperature control dial all the way to the left.
Introduce outside air from time to time for proper
ventilation.
Have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 FOR PLEASANT DRIVING
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be
charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubri-
cant SUN-PAG 56.
Before any electrical or electronic accessories are
installed, consult an authorized dealer.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause
severe damage which will result in the need to
replace your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system.
The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is not
recommended.
1. Improper installation of an electrical or electronic
accessory may cause a fire or electrical problem.
It also could result in failure of warranty coverage under
the new vehicle limited warranty.
The new refrigerant (HFC-134a) in your vehicle is
designed not to harm the earth’s ozone layer. How-
ever, it may slightly contribute to global warming.
It is recommended that the refrigerant be recovered
and recycled for future use.
2. When using a communication system such as a cellu-
lar phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, be sure to
install a separate external antenna. When a cellular phone
or a radio set is used by using an internal antenna alone,
it might cause failure to the vehicle’s electrical system
and could interfere with safe operation of the vehicle.
During a long period of disuse
The air conditioning should be operated for at least five
minutes each a week, even in cold weather. This is to
maintain lubrication of the compressor internal parts and
maintain the air conditioning in the best operating con-
dition.
WARNING!
If you use a cellular phone while driving, keep your
attention on your driving, in order to reduce risk of
accidents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE CARE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Cleaning the inside of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric, and flocked parts. . 249
▫ Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Genuine leather (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Ⅵ Cleaning the outside of your vehicle . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Foreign material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ During cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Waxing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Polishing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Damaged paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Window glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Cleaning the sunroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 255
▫ Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 VEHICLE CARE
In order to maintain the value and good looks of your
vehicle, perform regular maintenance using proper ma-
terials and procedures.
Be sure to use only those materials and procedures that
are in compliance with all local environmental pollution
control regulations. Carefully select the materials to be
used to be sure that they do not contain corrosives; if in
doubt, contact an authorized dealer for assistance in the
selection of these materials.
CAUTION!
Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poi-
sonous. Others are highly flammable. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use any product to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the instructions printed on
its container. Always open your vehicle doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use
the following chemicals to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Carbon Tetrachloride
Benzine
Naphtha
Acetone
Turpentine
Paint Thinner
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
These can all be dangerous, and can damage your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE CARE 249
CLEANING THE INSIDE OF YOUR VEHICLE
After cleaning the inside of your vehicle with cleaner,
wipe it dry in a shady, well ventilated area.
2. After using detergent, dip the cloth in fresh water and
wring out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent
thoroughly.
NOTE: Cleaners, conditioners, and protectants contain-
ing silicons or waxes may cause annoying reflections and
obscure vision.
CAUTION!
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
Upholstery
1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, maintain
the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean.
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If
stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned
with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned
with either upholstery cleaner or a 3% solution of neutral
detergent in lukewarm water.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
cracking of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances men-
tioned above.
7
NOTE: Always read the instructions on the cleaner
label.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and re-
move any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can
be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean colorfast
cloth and spot remover.
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric, and flocked parts
1. Lightly wipe with a soft cloth soaked in a 3% solution
of neutral detergent and water.
NOTE: If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush over the
surface in one direction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 VEHICLE CARE
Genuine leather (if so equipped)
1. Lightly wipe with a soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution
of neutral detergent and water.
6. The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if
it is exposed to the direct rays of the sun for long hours.
When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as
much as possible.
2. Dip the cloth in fresh water and wring it out well.
Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.
7. When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in
the summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather
seat may deteriorate and stick to the seat.
3. Apply a leather protecting agent to the genuine leather
surface.
CLEANING THE OUTSIDE OF YOUR VEHICLE
To protect your vehicle’s outside finish, it is important
that you wash it often and thoroughly. If desired, you
may wax your vehicle by using an automobile wax.
NOTE
1. If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe off the water
as quickly as possible with a dry, soft cloth.
2. Slight stains on genuine leather may be removed with
a leather cleaner.
Foreign material
Industrial fallout, road tar, bird droppings, tree sap,
insect remains, sea water, and other foreign matter can
damage the finish of your vehicle.
3. The genuine leather surface may be damaged if a
nylon brush is rubbed hard against it.
Generally, the longer the foreign material remains in
contact with the outside finish the more extensive the
damage. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible if it
becomes contaminated with foreign material.
4. Organic solvents such as benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
acid or alkaline solvents may discolor the genuine leather
surface and should not be used.
5. Dirty genuine leather seats may mildew. Be very
careful about oil stains and remove them immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE CARE 251
Washing
CAUTION!
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from
air, rain, snow, or road surface can damage the paint coat
and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect
your vehicle from this damage.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the
vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove
dust. Next, using an ample amount of clean water and a
car washing mitt or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to
bottom.
•
•
When washing the under side of your vehicle,
wear a pair of rubber gloves in order to protect
your hands.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
components in the engine compartment, as this
may adversely affect the starting circuit.
Exercise caution also when washing the under-
body; be careful not to spray water into the engine
compartment.
•
•
Using an automatic car wash, pay attention to the
following items, referring to the operation manual
or consulting a car wash operator.
Use a mild vehicle washing soap. Rinse thoroughly and
wipe dry with a chamois or soft cloth. After washing the
vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors,
hood, etc., where dirt is likely to remain.
7
The outside mirrors and the antenna are retracted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 VEHICLE CARE
During cold weather
CAUTION!
Salt and other chemicals that are spread on winter roads
in some geographical areas can have a detrimental effect
on the vehicle underbody. You should flush the under-
body with a high pressure hose every time you wash the
exterior of your vehicle.
Special care should be taken to remove mud or other
debris which could trap and hold salt and moisture.
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all water drops from
the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors
from freezing.
•
Some types of washers (including coin-operated
washers) apply high temperature and high pres-
sure to the vehicle, which may cause heat distor-
tion and damage to the resin parts of the vehicle
body, leakage of water into the vehicle, etc. There-
fore, be sure to observe the following.
•
•
Maintain a good distance of approx. 16 in. (40 cm)
or more between the vehicle body and the wash-
ing nozzle.
When washing around the door glass, hold the
nozzle at a distance of more than 40 in.(1m) and at
right angles to the glass surface.
NOTE: When a door is frozen, opening it by force may
tear or crack the rubber gasket installed around the door.
Therefore, pour warm water to melt the ice. Be sure to
wipe off water thoroughly after opening the door. To help
prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors,
hood, etc., treat the rubber seal with a lubricant designed
for rubber.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE CARE 253
Waxing your vehicle
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or when painted
surfaces do not shed water well.
Apply a small amount of wax to painted surfaces with a
soft cloth. After the wax has dried, polish with a dry soft
cloth.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
You should wax after the surfaces have cooled.
CAUTION!
•
Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
should not be used. Such waxes remove rust and
stain effectively from the paintwork, but are
harmful to the luster of the painted surface, since
they also remove paint/clearcoat.
Further, they are detrimental to glossy surfaces
such as the grille, garnish, moldings, etc.
•
•
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzene or paint
thinners to remove road tar or other contamina-
tion to the painted surface.
Do not apply wax on the areas having black mat
coating as it can cause uneven discoloration,
patches, blurs, etc. If stained with wax, immedi-
ately wipe off with a soft cloth and warm water.
7
•
Be careful when waxing the area around the
sunroof opening, not to apply any wax on the
weatherstrip (black rubber).
If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot main-
tain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 VEHICLE CARE
Polishing your vehicle
Cleaning plastic parts
If painted surfaces have been severely damaged and lost
their original luster and color tone, polish the surface
lightly with a fine polishing compound. Avoid limiting
your polishing to the damaged surface only; polish a
somewhat wider area, moving the polishing cloth in one
direction. After polishing, flush the compound from the
surface and apply a coat of wax to regain a beautiful
luster.
Use a sponge or chamois.
If vehicle wax adheres on the plastic bumper or mold-
ings, the surface may appear white in color. In this case,
wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth or
chamois.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not use a scrub brush or other hard tools as
they may damage the plastic part surface.
Damaged paint
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be
touched up as soon as possible with touch-up paint to
prevent corrosion.
Check body areas facing the road or the tires carefully for
damage to the paint coat caused by flying stones, etc. The
paint code number for your vehicle can be found on the
vehicle information code plate in the engine compart-
ment.
Do not use wax containing compound (polishing
compound) which may damage the plastic part
surface.
•
Do not bring plastic parts into contact with brake
fluids, engine oils, greases, thinner for painting,
and sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
stain, crack or discolor the plastic parts.
If they touch the plastic part, wipe them with a
soft cloth, or chamois and an aqueous solution of
neutral detergent. Then, immediately rinse the
affected parts with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE CARE 255
Chrome parts
Window glass
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash
with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a nonabrasive
automotive wax. If the chrome is severely damaged or
pitted use a commercially available chrome polish.
The window glass can be cleaned using only a sponge
and water. Glass cleaner can be used to remove wax, oil,
grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)
Wiper blades
A protective coating is provided over aluminum wheels.
Clean aluminum wheels with a cleaner designed for use
on aluminum and apply an appropriate protection agent.
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead
insects, etc., from the wiper blades.
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer clean the
windshield properly.
Cleaning the sunroof (if so equipped)
CAUTION!
Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth. Hard
deposits should be wiped away with a cloth dipped in
warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipe away the solu-
tion with a sponge dipped in fresh water.
7
•
•
Do not use abrasive cleaners.
Brushes may damage the aluminum wheel sur-
face. Be sure to use a sponge, chamois, etc.
•
•
Do not apply hot water directly from a steam
cleaner to the wheel surface.
NOTE: The surface treatment on the inside of the glass
may be removed if a hard cloth or organic solvent is used.
Wheels exposed to sea water or road chemicals
should be cleaned as soon as possible.
Engine compartment
Never spray or splash water on the electrical components
in the engine compartment, as this may adversely affect
the electrical circuits.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Ⅵ If the vehicle breaks down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ If the engine quits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Ⅵ Operation under adverse driving conditions. . . 259
Ⅵ Jacking and tire changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Jacking up the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Ⅵ Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Ⅵ Jump-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . 280
Ⅵ Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Ⅵ Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Fuse block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Ⅵ Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Fuse load capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Ⅵ Replacement of light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Bulb capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or
snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ On a wet road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ On snowy or icy roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Ⅵ Spare tire, jack and tool set storage . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Handling spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Ⅵ Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Ⅵ Wheel covers (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 EMERGENCIES
▫ Headlights (Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Headlights (Type 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Adjustment of headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Front turn signal and parking lights. . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Front side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Rear combination lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ High-mounted stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ License plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 259
IF THE VEHICLE BREAKS DOWN
OPERATION UNDER ADVERSE DRIVING
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move to the
shoulder and activate the hazard warning flashers. If
there is no shoulder, or the shoulder is not safe, drive in
the right lane, slowly, with the hazard flashers activated,
until you reach a safe place to stop. Keep the flashers
activated.
CONDITIONS
If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or
snow
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the wheels.
Move the gearshift lever or selector lever rhythmically
between 1st and REVERSE position (with manual trans-
axle), ‘‘L’’ (Low) and ‘‘R’’ (REVERSE) position (with
automatic transaxle), Autostick and ‘‘R’’ (REVERSE) po-
sition (with automatic transaxle), while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator pedal.
If the engine quits
If the engine stops, power will be lost to the steering and
brakes, making steering and braking difficult.
1. The brake booster becomes inoperative and the brake
pedal will be harder to push than usual.
2. Since power steering system is not operative, the
steering wheel will be stiff when turning. Turn the wheel
with more effort than usual.
Avoid racing the engine or spinning the wheels. Pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in
overheating and transaxle failure.
8
Allow the engine to idle for a few minutes to let the
transaxle cool between rocking attempts.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking at-
tempts, seek other assistance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 EMERGENCIES
On a wet road
WARNING!
When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck
position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is
clear of people. The rocking motion may cause the
vehicle to suddenly lurch forward or backward,
causing injury to by-standers.
CAUTION!
•
•
Avoid flooded roads. Water depth can be decep-
tive, and you could be seriously hurt by driving
into flood water.
When driving in rain, on water-covered roads, or
through a vehicle wash, water could enter the
brake drum linings or discs, resulting in tempo-
rarily ineffective brakes. In such cases, lightly
depress the brake pedal to see if the brakes
operate properly. If they do not, lightly depress
the pedal several times while driving in order to
dry the brake pads or linings, then check them
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 261
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
•
When driving in rain, a layer of water may form
between the tires and the road surface (hydroplan-
ing).
Tire chains are not recommended for your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the body is
small, and body damage may occur.
This reduces a tire’s frictional resistance on the
road, resulting in loss of steering stability and
braking capability. When driving on a wet road,
observe the following:
(a) Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
(b) Do not drive on worn tires.
2. Drive slowly. Avoid any sudden starts or stops, abrupt
brake application or sharp cornering.
3. Depressing the brake pedal during travel on snowy or
icy roads may cause tire slippage and skidding. When a
skid occurs, take your foot off the accelerator. Steer gently
into the skid. Braking will differ, depending upon
whether you have anti-lock brakes (ABS). If you do have
ABS, brake by pressing the brake pedal firmly, and
keeping it pressed. If you do not have ABS (vehicles
without anti-lock braking system) pump the brake pedal
with short rapid jabs, each time fully applying and fully
releasing for greatest effect.
(c) Always maintain the specified tire inflation
pressures.
On snowy or icy roads
1. When driving on a road covered by snow or ice, it is
recommended that you use snow tires.
8
4. Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 EMERGENCIES
SPARE TIRE, JACK AND TOOL SET STORAGE
Handling spare tire
Loosen
Jack
Clamp
Tool set
N01A1180
N03A1870
The spare tire, jack and tool set are stowed in the trunk.
Remove the installation clamp to remove the spare tire.
To install the spare tire, tighten the clamp firmly with
your fingers until the spare tire has no more play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 263
Jack
COMPACT SPARE TIRE
The compact spare tire is designed to save space in the
trunk and its lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat
tire occurs.
Storage
bracket
CAUTION!
•
•
The tire pressure should be periodically checked
and maintained at the specified pressure while
the tire is stowed.
Driving with an insufficient tire pressure can lead
to an accident. If you have no choice but to drive
with an insufficient tire pressure, keep your speed
down and adjust to the specified pressure [60 psi
(420 kPa)] as soon as possible.
To store
To remove
N21C0010
To remove
8
•
•
The compact spare should only be used temporarily
and should be returned to the trunk and the original
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible. If your
vehicle is equipped with aluminum type wheels, the
wheel nuts for aluminum type wheels can be used
temporarily on the compact spare tire wheel.
Turn the shaft end so that the jack contracts and detach it
from the storage bracket.
To store
Turn the shaft end by hand to expand the jack until it is
secured firmly in position.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) while the com-
pact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 EMERGENCIES
WHEEL COVERS (IF SO EQUIPPED)
CAUTION!
To remove
•
•
Avoid rapid starting and braking with a compact
spare tire.
Avoid driving through automatic vehicle washes
and over obstacles that could possibly damage the
vehicle’s under-carriage. Because the tire is
smaller than the original tire, vehicle ground
clearance is slightly reduced.
•
•
As the compact spare tire is specifically designed
for your vehicle, it should not be used on any
other vehicle.
The compact spare tire should not be used on any
other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact
spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle components may occur.
N23B0630
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it deeply into
the notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry the cover
away from the wheel.
Using the same procedure on the other side, work the
wheel cover away from the wheel to remove it com-
pletely.
•
•
Do not use snow chains with your compact spare
tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a snow chain
will not fit properly. This could cause damage to
the vehicle and could result in loss of the chains.
The compact spare tire pressure should be
checked once a month while the tire is stowed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 265
NOTE: The wheel cover is made of plastic; use caution
To install
when prying it off.
NOTE: Some styles of wheels will have bolt-on type
wheel covers. To remove this style, remove the bolts that
hold the cover to the wheel.
CAUTION!
Trying to simply remove the wheel cover with your
bare hands may severely injure your fingers.
N23B0910
Align the air valve with the valve opening provided on
the wheel cover.
8
Then pound around the outer edge of the wheel cover
with your hand to secure it in place.
NOTE: The full wheel cover has its reverse side pro-
vided with a symbol mark to show the air valve location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 EMERGENCIES
Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure
that the opening with the symbol mark is correctly
aligned with the air valve.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
A
If a tire must be changed, do so only after making sure
the vehicle is stopped in a safe, flat location.
Jacking up the vehicle
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
B
2. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal light, etc., at an ad-
equate distance from the vehicle, and have all passengers
leave the vehicle. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position.
N24A0100
4. Apply a chock or block (A) at the tire diagonally
opposite the tire (B) to be changed.
3. Set the parking brake firmly, and move the gearshift
lever (manual transaxle) to the “N” (Neutral) position or
move the selector lever (automatic transaxle) to the “P”
(PARK) position.
NOTE: The chock shown is not supplied with the ve-
hicle. It is recommended that you keep one in the vehicle
for use if required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 267
WARNING!
•
•
Do not set the jack at any other position on the
vehicle than those specified. If the jack is set at a
wrong position, the body of the vehicle could be
dented or the jack might fall over and cause
personal injury.
Avoid using the jack on tilted or soft surfaces.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal
injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface.
Before setting the jack, check to ensure that there
is no sand or pebbles on the underside of the jack
base.
N22A1280
5. Place the jack under one of the jacking points shown in
the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tire
being changed.
8
C = Jacking point
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 EMERGENCIES
N22A1450
N21C0280
6. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange portion (D) fits
in the groove at the top of the jack.
NOTE: Before use, turn the top of jack and set it as
shown in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 269
N22A1830
N22A0010
7. Remove the wheel nut wrench and bar from the tool
bag (located inside the trunk).
8. Insert the bar (E) into the wheel nut wrench (F). Then
attach the end of the bar to the jack end, as shown in the
illustration.
8
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
•
Before using the jack, chock or block the wheel
that is tire diagonally opposite the jacking point.
Stop jacking up the vehicle when the tire is raised
off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle
any higher.
•
•
Do not get under the vehicle while using the jack.
Avoid jarring the raised vehicle or leaving it
supported on the jack for extended periods. Both
are very dangerous.
N24A1500
•
•
•
•
Do not use a jack other than the one provided
with your vehicle.
NOTE: Place the spare wheel under the vehicle body
near the jack; this helps to minimize danger should the
jack slip out of position.
The jack should not be used for any purpose other
than changing a tire.
No one should stay in the vehicle while the jack is
used.
Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on the jack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 271
Tapered nut
Flange nut
N24A0210
N24A1410
9. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench,
then take the wheel off.
NOTE: Clear out any mud, etc. on the hub surface, hub
bolts or in the installation holes in the wheel.
8
10. Install the spare wheel with the nut’s tapered end
facing inward, then tighten by hand until the wheel is no
longer loose.
CAUTION!
Handle the wheel cover carefully when replacing the
flat tire, to avoid the wheel surface becoming
scratched and causing premature corrosion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Never apply oil to either wheel bolts or nuts as it can
cause them to overtighten.
NOTE: Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the steel
wheel, but return to the original wheel and tire as soon as
possible.
If all four wheels are changed to steel wheels, use
tapered nuts.
N24A0220
11. Lower the vehicle slowly and then tighten the nuts in
the sequence shown in the illustration until each nut has
been tightened to the specified torque.
88 to 108 N•m (65 to 80 ft lb)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 273
CAUTION!
Never use extra force with your foot on the wheel
nut wrench or a pipe extension as you can over-
tighten the nut.
12. Lower and remove the jack, and store the jack, flat
tire and chock. Have the damaged tire repaired as soon as
possible.
N24A1420
13. Check tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressure
specifications are shown on a placard located on the
driver’s side ‘‘B’’-Pillar.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 EMERGENCIES
ENGINE OVERHEATING
If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator enters
the “H” (hot) position, the engine may be overheated.
CAUTION!
•
The emergency tire is to be used only temporarily
when the standard tire is damaged. Repair the
damaged tire as soon as possible. Replace the
emergency tire with the standard tire.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
•
•
After changing the tire and driving the vehicle
approximately 621 miles (1000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they are not loose.
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the steering wheel vibrates after changing the
tire, have the tire checked for balance at an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
Avoid mixing one type of tire with another type or
using tires of a size other than the specified size.
Premature mechanical wear and reduced handling
may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 275
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition key
to the OFF position. The fan is temperature con-
trolled and can start at any time the ignition key is
in the ON position.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Maintenance Section of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
8
JUMP-STARTING THE ENGINE
If the engine cannot be started because the battery is
weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be
used with booster cables to start the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 EMERGENCIES
connection. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle,
and the bad ground could damage the electrical systems.
WARNING!
When using jumper cables to start a vehicle, follow
procedures exactly and exercise extreme caution.
CAUTION!
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volts, both sys-
tems can be damaged.
CAUTION!
Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle can-
not be started this way. Pushing or towing a vehicle
equipped with a manual transaxle may overheat and
damage the catalytic converter. Also, there is a
greater risk of an accident when a vehicle is being
pushed or towed.
3. You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the
parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic
transaxle in “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
(Neutral). Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
WARNING!
1. Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical con-
tact.
Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position on
both vehicles.
Use care to make sure that the cables or your clothes
are never caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.
2. Position the vehicles close enough together so the
booster cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 277
NOTE: Turn off all lights, heater and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save both batter-
ies.
4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the proper level.
(See “Battery” on page 317.)
WARNING!
If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or appears to be
frozen, do not attempt jump starting.
The battery might rupture or explode if the tempera-
ture is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to
the proper level.
N29A0790
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 EMERGENCIES
6. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and the
other end to the engine block of the vehicle with the
discharged battery (A) at the point farthest from the
battery.
N29A1070
5. Connect one end of one booster cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other
end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B).
NOTE: Remove the terminal cover before connecting
the booster cable to the positive terminal of the battery.
Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result.
Check the booster cables for damage and corrosion
before use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 279
WARNING!
WARNING!
•
•
Be sure to observe the connecting sequence of ①
→ ② → ③ → ④.
Make sure that the connection ④ is made to the
engine properly. If the connection is directly made
to the negative side of the battery, the flammable
gases generated from the battery might catch fire
and explode.
•
Charging the battery installed in the vehicle
might cause the battery to catch fire and explode.
Or, damage to the vehicle could result. If it has to
be charged in that condition for unavoidable
reasons, disconnect the vehicle side negative lead.
•
•
Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the
battery because the battery may produce an explosion.
•
•
When connecting the booster cable, do not con-
nect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-)
terminal. Otherwise sparks might cause explosion
of the battery.
Use adequate ventilation when charging or using
the battery in an enclosed space.
•
•
Remove all the caps before charging the battery.
Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive diluted sulfuric
acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with your hands,
eyes, clothes, or the painted surface of your vehicle,
thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte gets in
your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water imme-
diately, and get prompt medical attention.
Use care not to have the booster cable caught in
the cooling fan or other rotating parts in the
engine compartment.
8
7. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the
reverse order.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
•
Always wear protective clothing and goggles
when working near the battery.
•
•
Tie-down hooks should never be used for towing
purposes.
This vehicle can NOT be towed by a tow truck
using sling lift type equipment. This is to prevent
the bumper from deformation. If this vehicle is
towed, use wheel lift, dolly type or flat bed
equipment.
Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes
If the vehicle is driven without sufficient battery charge,
after the engine has been started by using booster cables,
the engine may misfire. This can cause the anti-lock
braking system warning light to blink on and off. This is
a result of insufficient battery voltage; it is not a malfunc-
tion of the brake system. If this happens, fully charge the
battery before driving.
•
Use the flat bed type, dolly type or dolly type
equipment if a vehicle has the following condi-
tions:
•
Any of the transaxle, axles, steering system or
power train is damaged.
•
Automatic transaxle fluid level is low.
TOWING
When towing your vehicle, all state and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. When towing is required, contact a
professional towing service and make sure that flat bed type,
dolly type or wheel lift type towing equipment is used. Do
not attempt to be towed by another vehicle with a rope using
the tie-down hooks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 281
Sling lift type
CAUTION!
•
Towing should only be done by a professional
tow service particularly if it will involve towing
on winding roads, hills or heavy traffic. If you
have any doubts, use a professional tow service.
Flat bed type
Dolly type
Towing—front wheel lift
Place the gearshift lever (manual transaxle) to Neutral or
the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position. Release the parking brake.
Towing—rear wheel lift
Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position and secure
the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a
rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the
“LOCK” position. This will result in damage to the
steering lock mechanism.
Wheel lift type
Front wheel lift
8
If you have to tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear
wheels raised (with the front wheels on the ground):
Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances.
Rear wheel lift
•
•
Speed: 30 mph (50 km/ h)
Distance: 18 miles (30 km)
N25A0202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 EMERGENCIES
Fuse block
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the electrical system due to short-
circuiting or overloading, each individual circuit is pro-
vided with a fuse. There are fuse blocks in the passenger
compartment and in the engine compartment.
Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the
rear wheels raised (with the front wheels on the
ground) when the automatic transaxle fluid level is
low. This may cause serious and expensive damage
to the transaxle.
The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located on
the driver’s side at the position shown in the illustration.
FUSES
Passenger compartment
N09A1880
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is located as
shown in the illustration.
N09A1230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 283
FUSIBLE LINKS
Fuse load capacities
Fusible links will melt to prevent a fire in the event that
a large current flows through a system protected by a
fusible link. In case of a melted fusible link, see your
authorized dealer for inspection and replacement.
8
N29C0322
The fuse cover lists the names of the electrical systems
and the fuse capacities. Spare fuses are contained in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 EMERGENCIES
cover of the instrument panel (driver’s side). Always use
a fuse of the same capacity for replacement.
No. Symbol Electrical system
Capacity
7.5A
20A
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Engine Control
Windshield wiper
Door mirror heater
Relay
Passenger compartment fuse location
Fuse location table
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
10A
No. Symbol Electrical system
Capacity
20A
—
CRUISE
1
2
Audio
Cruise control
Back up light
Gauge
—
—
3
Sunroof
20A
15A
30A
30A
—
SOCKET
4
Accessory socket
Engine control
5
Rear window defogger
30A
6
Heater
25
Spare fuse
20A
—
7
—
—
15A
8
—
—
—
10A
SOCKET
9
Accessory socket
Door lock
15A
15A
15A
15A
7.5A
7.5A
¼ Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicles,
depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
10
11
12
13
14
Rear window wiper
—
¼ The table above shows the main equipment corre-
sponding to each fuse.
—
Relay
R/C MIR
Electric remote-controlled outside
mirror
15
16
—
—
—
Cigarette lighter
15A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 285
Engine compartment Fuse location table
Engine compartment fuse location
Spare fuse location
Spare fuses are contained in the cover of the instru-
ment panel (driver’s side). Always use a fuse of the
same capacity for replacement.
8
N29B2642
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 EMERGENCIES
No.
1
Symbol
Electrical system
Fuse (+B)
Capacity
60A
50A
60A
40A
30A
15A
—
No.
22
Symbol
Electrical system
Dome lights
Audio
Capacity
10A
2
Radiator fan motor
Anti-lock braking system
Ignition switch
23
10A
3
24
Fuel pump
Defroster
15A
4
25
40A
5
Electric window controls
Fog lights
•
Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle. Fuse
application depends on the vehicle model, specifica-
tions, or options.
6
7
—
—
8
Horn
15A
20A
10A
15A
—
9
Engine control
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
30A
40A
50A
60A
BROWN
RED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Air conditioning
Stop lights
LIGHT BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
—
Alternator
7.5A
10A
20A
10A
10A
10A
10A
7.5A
7.5A
Hazard warning flasher
Automatic transaxle
Headlights high beam (right)
Headlights high beam (left)
Headlights low beam (right)
Headlights low beam (left)
Position lights (right)
Position lights (left)
GREEN
RED
YELLOW
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 287
Fuse replacement
OK
Blown fuse
N29C0200
N29C0020
4. There is a fuse puller in the cover of the instrument
panel (driver’s side). Remove the fuse puller, clamp it on
the fuse you wish to remove, and pull the fuse straight
out from the fuse block. If the fuse is not blown, some-
thing else must be causing the problem; contact an
authorized dealer to have the problem checked.
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical
item concerned and turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position.
8
2. Remove the fuse cover.
3. Referring to the fuse location diagrams and corre-
sponding tables, check the fuse that relates to the prob-
lem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
•
•
Never use a fuse with a capacity larger than that
specified or any substitute, such as wire, foil, etc.
Doing so will cause the circuit wiring to heat up
and could cause a fire.
If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a
short time, have the electrical system checked by
an authorized dealer to find and correct the cause.
REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is off. Do not
touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare
fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evaporate when
the bulb gets hot and the vapor will condense on the
reflector and dim the surface.
N29C0010
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity securely into the
fuse block location.
Bulb capacity
A bulb should only be replaced with a new bulb of the
same rating and type. The designation can be found on
the base of the bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 289
N10B2800
N10B2810
Outside
Wattage or
ANSI Trade No.
Description
Candela Power
or Bulb type
Wattage or
ANSI Trade No.
or Bulb type
8
Description
Candela Power
6 - High-mounted stop
light
18W (W16W)
—
1 - Headlight (Type 1)
2 - Headlight (Type 2)
3 - Front side marker light
60W
9005 X/ S
(HB3A)
7 - Stop and tail light
8 - Back up light
32/ 3cp
18W
32cp
3cp
1157
921
51W
9006 X/ S
(HB4A)
9 - Rear turn signal light
10 - Rear side marker light
11 - License plate light
1156NA
168
1.5cp
2.2cp
194NA
NAk
4 - Front turn signal and
parking light
3cp
168
5 - Front fog light
37.5W
896
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 EMERGENCIES
Inside
Headlights (Type 1)
Wattage or
1. Turn the light socket counterclockwise and pull it out
and remove the light bulb.
Description
Candela Power
Dome Light
10W
8W
5W
4W
Rear personal light
Trunk light
Reading light
N10C1910
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 291
2. Pull the clip (A) and remove the light bulb from the
socket.
Headlights (Type 2)
1. Loosen the bolt (A), move the horn (B) (left side only).
N10C1920
N10C1760
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 EMERGENCIES
2. Turn the light socket counterclockwise and pull it out
and remove the light bulb.
3. Pull the clip (A) and remove the light bulb from the
socket.
N10C1930
N10C1940
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 293
Adjustment of headlight aim
The alignment of the headlights should be checked by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
•
Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand
could cause the bulb to break the next time the
headlights are operated.
Front turn signal and parking lights
If the glass surface is dirty, it should be cleaned
with alcohol and installed after drying thor-
oughly.
8
N10F0760
Turn the light socket counterclockwise and pull it out and
remove the light bulb.
N10C1840
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 EMERGENCIES
Front side marker lights
Front fog lights
1. Turn the front turn signal light socket counterclock-
wise.
N10D0170
Turn the light socket counterclockwise and pull it out and
remove the light bulb.
N10F0760
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 295
2. Turn the light socket counterclockwise and pull it out.
3. Pull both clips away from the center as shown and
remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out.
N10X1650
N10C1700
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 EMERGENCIES
Rear combination lights
CAUTION!
1. Turn the trim cover clip (A) counterclockwise and
remove the trim cover clip. Partially remove the trim
cover in the trunk.
•
Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand
could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog
lights are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it should be cleaned
with alcohol and installed after drying thor-
oughly.
N20I0170
N10C1840
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 297
2. Remove the light case mounting nuts. Disconnect the
connector.
Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counter-
clockwise while pressing it inward.
A - Stop and tail light
B - Rear turn signal light
C - Back up light
D - Rear side marker light
N20I0100
N20I0160
8
3. Slide the light unit outward to remove it. Remove each
bulb socket assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 EMERGENCIES
High-mounted stop light
License plate light
N10J0310
N10V0700
Remove the lens mounting screws, remove the socket
assembly and the bulb together by turning it counter-
clockwise. And remove the bulb by pulling out.
Remove the socket assembly and bulb together by turn-
ing it counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 299
Trunk light
Dome light
1. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the notch of the
light assembly and pry gently downward to remove it.
Clips
Type 1
N10O0230
Pull both clips away from the center as shown and
remove the light unit. Then remove the bulb by pulling
out.
8
N10M0380
NOTE: Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to
avoid scratching the light assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 EMERGENCIES
2. Remove the light bulb from the light holder.
Reading lights
N10M0410
N11I0040
Insert a straight blade screwdriver into the notch of the
light assembly and pry gently to remove the lens.
Remove the light bulb from the light holder.
NOTE: Wrap a cloth around the tip of the straight blade
screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCIES 301
Rear personal light
N10Q0090
Insert the tip of a flat blade screwdriver at the edge of the
lens, pry gently to remove the lens, and then remove the
bulb from the light holder.
8
NOTE: Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in
order to avoid scratching the lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ View of engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Ⅵ Service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Ⅵ Emission-control system maintenance . . . . . . . 307
Ⅵ Emissions Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . . 308
Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Distributor cap and rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Ⅵ General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Engine oil and oil filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Ⅵ Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ To check the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ To add coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Ⅵ Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Ⅵ Clutch fluid (manual transaxle) . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ To check the clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ To replace the fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Ⅵ Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ During cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Fuel system (tank, filler tube, connections,
and fuel tank filler cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Fuel hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Air cleaner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
9
▫ Evaporative emission control system
(except evaporative emission canister) . . . . . . . 310
▫ Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Ignition cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 MAINTENANCE
▫ Disconnection and connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Ⅵ Automatic transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ To check the fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Procedure for checking the fluid level . . . . . . . 322
Ⅵ Manual transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Ⅵ Drive belt (for generator, water pump, power
steering pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Ⅵ Timing belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Ⅵ Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Radial ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Ⅵ Disc brake pads, rear drum brake linings
and rear wheel cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫
Tire pressure for sustained high-speed driving . . . 330
Ⅵ Brake hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Oversize tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Cargo loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Ⅵ Regular Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Ⅵ Severe Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Ⅵ Ball joint, steering linkage seal and drive
shaft boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Ⅵ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . 323
Ⅵ Door hinges, rear hatch hinges, hood lock
release mechanism and safety catch . . . . . . . . . 324
Ⅵ Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Ⅵ Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Ⅵ Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 305
VIEW OF ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7. Brake fluid reservoir
8. Windshield washer reservoir
9. Drive belt
2.4 liter engine
10. Radiator cap
11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
12. Air cleaner filter
3.0 liter engine
Q02A2510
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil level dipstick
5. Battery
9
Q02A2520
6. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transaxle only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 MAINTENANCE
NOTE: The Scheduled Maintenance Charts are located
in the rear of this maintenance section. Always refer to
the schedules for proper service intervals.
WARNING!
•
•
When checking or servicing the inside of the
engine compartment, be sure the engine is
stopped and has had a chance to cool down.
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals serves
to preserve the value and appearance as long as possible.
Some maintenance items can be performed by the owner,
while others should be done only by an authorized
dealer.
This section describes only those items which can be
performed by the owner. In the event a malfunction or
other problem is discovered, have it corrected by an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to do work in the engine com-
partment with the engine running, be especially
careful that your clothing, hair, etc. does not
become caught by the fan, drive belts, or other
moving parts.
This section contains information on inspection mainte-
nance procedures that you can do yourself, if you so
desire. Follow the instructions and precautions for each
of the various procedures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 307
EMISSION-CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-control sys-
tem which satisfies all requirements of the U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency. The emission-control system
consists of:
WARNING!
•
The fan may turn on automatically even if the
engine is not running; turn the ignition key to the
“LOCK” position and remove the key to ensure
safety while you work in the engine compartment.
(1) a positive crankcase ventilation system
(2) an evaporative emission-control system
(3) an exhaust emission- control system.
•
•
Do not smoke, or allow open flames around fuel
or the battery. The fumes are flammable.
The ЉScheduledЉ maintenance services listed must be
performed at the times or mileages specified to assure the
continued proper functioning of the emission-control
system. These, and all other “General” maintenance
services included in this manual, should be performed to
provide the best vehicle performance and reliability.
Be extremely cautious when working around the
battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfu-
ric acid.
•
•
Do not get under your vehicle with just the car’s
jack supporting it.
Always use properly rated automotive jack
stands.
More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles
driven under severe operating conditions such as dusty
areas and frequent start and stop driving.
In order to assure the proper function of the emission-
control system, it is recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized
dealer in accordance with the schedule in this manual.
Inspection and service should also be performed any
time a malfunction is suspected.
9
Improper handling of components and materials
used in the vehicle can endanger your personal
safety. Consult an authorized dealer if you have
questions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 MAINTENANCE
EMISSIONS TESTING
monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and
automatic transaxle control systems. When these systems
are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excel-
lent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
In some localities, it may be or will become a legal
requirement to ensure that all emissions components and
systems are functioning properly as a part of the test
procedure. The test center accomplishes this by checking
the On Board Diagnostic System system (OBD) with an
electronic scan tool. If your vehicle has recently been
serviced, the OBD system may have been reset to a Љnot
readyЉ condition because the OBD system has not had
sufficient time since the servicing to reconfirm that
emissions components are operating properly. In most
cases, a reasonable mix and amount of normal city and
highway driving and at least one overnight-off period
will be required to prepare your vehicle for this check;
however your DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation
dealer has the equipment and procedures required to
make certain that the OBD system of your vehicle is
ready for the required testing.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light. It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the light on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions
tests can be performed.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 309
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, do not
operate the vehicle. Any spark (including from the
ignition ), flame or smoking material could cause an
explosion or fire. Call an authorized dealer for
assistance.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the light may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time you
add fuel. Tighten the cap until you hear it “click.”
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Fuel hoses
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/ scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the DaimlerChrysler Motors Corpora-
tion warranty.
Inspect the surfaces of hoses for evidence of heat and
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber, cracking,
tears, cuts and abrasions. Particular attention should be
paid to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect all
hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make
sure they are secure and that no leaks exist. If there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage, hoses should be
replaced immediately.
Fuel system (tank, filler tube, connections, and
fuel tank filler cap)
9
Check periodically for damage or leakage in the fuel lines
and connections, and check for damage and looseness of
the fuel tank filler tube cap. Particular attention should be
paid to examining those fuel lines nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 MAINTENANCE
Air cleaner filter
After replacing the air cleaner filter, reinstall the cover in
its original position.
CAUTION!
Take care not to damage the engine air flow sensor
when removing the air cleaner cover.
Evaporative emission control system (except
evaporative emission canister)
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or damaged, the
fuel-vapor mixture will escape, polluting the atmosphere.
Have the system checked at an authorized dealer at the
mileage specified on the scheduled maintenance chart.
M23A0130
The air cleaner filter will become dirty and loaded with
dust during use, and the filtering effect will be substan-
tially reduced. Replace it with a new filter in accordance
with the schedule in this manual.
1. Unclamp the air cleaner cover.
2. Take out the air cleaner filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 311
Spark plugs
require replacement as frequently as the conventional
type spark plug and are designed to last much longer.
Iridium tipped
type
NOTE: Use the recommended or equivalent spark plugs
listed under “Engine specifications” on page 361.
Use of non-recommended plugs will cause engine dam-
age, loss of performance or radio noise.
Ignition cables
The ignition cables should be kept clean, properly con-
nected, and fully seated. Terminals should be fully seated
and should not be removed from the distributor or coil
towers unless they are damaged or cable testing indicates
high resistance or broken insulation. Cracked, damaged,
or faulty cables must be replaced.
P15A0340
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine
performance and emission-control.
Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. Spark
plugs should be replaced at the mileage specified on the
scheduled maintenance chart.
Distributor cap and rotor
Check the distributor cap and rotor to maintain proper
function and good emission control.
9
Your vehicle may be equipped with standard type spark
plugs or iridium tipped ones. Iridium tipped spark plugs
are identified by blue marks on the ceramic. They do not
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Engine oil and oil filter
The following pages contain the maintenance service
recommended by DaimlerChrysler. In addition to the
general maintenance items for which fixed maintenance
intervals have been specified, there are other items which
are expected to operate satisfactorily without periodic
maintenance.
2.4 liter engine
Good
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
See your authorized dealer for assistance, if you have any
questions.
M03A0700
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 313
NOTE: The engine must be “OFF” when performing oil
level checks.
3.0 liter engine
Good
If the level does not reach the range of “Good”, which
indicates minimum necessary quantity of oil, remove the
oil filler cap on the engine valve cover, and refill to within
the “Good” range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration and
loss of oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
M03A0710
To check and refill engine oil
WARNING!
It is normal for an engine to consume some oil. You may
find it necessary to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine, check the
engine oil level. Replenish if necessary.
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, wipe it off,
and gently insert it fully into the crankcase. Slowly
remove it again. The oil level must not exceed the range
of “Good” on the dipstick.
•
•
Used engine oil is contaminated, and can cause
skin problems: Avoid contact with the skin and
wash thoroughly after working with used oil.
9
Keep used oil out of reach of children.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 MAINTENANCE
To replace the oil filter
Engine oil identification mark
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or mileage
specified on the scheduled maintenance chart.
ILSAC certification mark
(“Starburst” symbol)
You should be sure that any replacement filter used on
this vehicle is a high quality filter. The manufacturer’s
specifications for Genuine DaimlerChrysler oil filters
require that the filter be capable of withstanding a
pressure of 256 psi (1.8MPa). A Genuine DaimlerChrysler
oil filter is recommended as a replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on the filter.
M03A0150
Use only engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification
symbol on the front of the container.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 315
Recommended engine oil viscosity
API service symbol
M03A1320
M03B0010
If you are unable to find oils with the ILSAC certification
mark (“Starburst” symbol), an API classification SL,
SL/ CF oil with above label may be used.
This mark appears on the top of the oil containers and
has three distinct areas for identifying various aspects of
the oil.
Use engine oil with proper thickness for the outdoor
temperature where you will be driving.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is best for the outdoor temperature
range shown in the above chart.
You are strongly encouraged to use SAE 5W-30 engine
oils to aid in low temperature starting and for improved
fuel economy.
9
1. The top portion will indicate the quality of the oil.
2. The center portion will show the SAE grade of the oil
viscosity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COOLANT
CAUTION!
To check the coolant level
•
•
Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or any
engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol
anti-freeze. The use of an improper anti-freeze can
cause corrosion of aluminum components.
The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual
method for determining the coolant level. When the
engine is cold, the level of the coolant in the reserve tank
should be between the FULL and LOW marks. The
radiator normally remains completely full so there is no
need to remove the radiator cap except for checking the
coolant freeze point or replacing the antifreeze coolant.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, a minimum of 50% concentration
of ethylene-glycol antifreeze in water should be
added to the reserve tank. Do not overfill. A
higher concentration (not to exceed 60%) should
be used if a lower freezing point is required. The
concentration level can be checked using instru-
ments available at automotive supply stores, or
can be done by your authorized dealer or service
station. Use only high quality ethylene-glycol
antifreeze coolant formulated to prevent corrosion
of all cooling system metals.
Do not top off with water only. Water by itself
reduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze quali-
ties of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It
can also cause damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze. Do not use tap water, as it may
cause corrosion and rust formation.
To add coolant
Use DaimlerChrysler Genuine Coolant or an equivalent.
Genuine Coolant provides excellent protection against
corrosion and rust formation of all metals, including
aluminum, and prevents clogs in the radiator, heater,
cylinder head, engine block, etc.
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the level
in the reserve tank does not drop when the engine cools,
the system should be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for inspection of the
cooling system.
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 317
Radiator cap
5. If the temperature of the engine coolant does not rise
normally after engine warm-up, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have the thermostat checked, and
replaced if necessary.
The radiator cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of coolant and engine damage.
WARNING!
BRAKE FLUID
Make sure that the engine is thoroughly cooled
down before removing the radiator cap, otherwise
hot steam or boiling coolant may gush from the filler
port and scald you.
Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
should be used. The reservoir cap must be fully tightened
to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
CAUTION!
Points to remember
1. Do not overfill the reserve tank.
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contact,
mix with, or otherwise contaminate the brake
fluid. Seal damage will result.
Take care in handling brake fluid as it may cause
damage to painted surfaces.
Use only the specified brake fluid. Also, the
additives in different brands may result in a
chemical reaction when mixed together, so avoid
mixing different brands if possible.
2. A special radiator cap is used to ensure sealing and to
allow the coolant to return from the reserve tank to the
radiator when the engine cools. If cap replacement is
necessary, use the proper cap.
•
•
9
3. Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator using
proper instruments, when it is safe to do so. If antifreeze
is added, the contents of the reserve tank must be
protected against freezing.
4. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent the
brake fluid from evaporating or absorbing moisture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 MAINTENANCE
CLUTCH FLUID (MANUAL TRANSAXLE)
To replace the fluid
Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
should be used.
The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contami-
nation from foreign matter or moisture.
CAUTION!
Good
•
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contact,
mix with, or otherwise contaminate the clutch
fluid. Seal damage will result.
•
•
Take care in handling clutch fluid as it may cause
damage to painted surfaces.
M10A0040
Use only the specified clutch fluid.
Also, the additives in different brands may result
in a chemical reaction when mixed together, so
avoid mixing different brands if possible.
To check the clutch fluid
The clutch fluid in the clutch master cylinder should be
checked when performing other underhood services. In
addition, the system should be checked for leakage at the
same time. Check to make certain that the clutch fluid
level is always between the MAX and MIN level mark-
ings on the fluid reservoir and refill the fluid, if necessary.
A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system
which should be inspected by an authorized dealer and
repaired immediately.
•
Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent the
clutch fluid from deteriorating due to moisture or
air exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 319
BATTERY
means the battery is low on charge and may require
charging. Have it checked at an authorized dealer.
Test indicator
During cold weather
The capacity of the battery is reduced at low tempera-
tures. This is the result of its chemical and physical
properties and this is why a very cold battery, particu-
larly one that is not fully charged, will only deliver a
fraction of the starter current that is normally available.
It is recommended that you have the battery checked by
an authorized dealer before the start of cold weather and,
if necessary, have it charged or replaced. This not only
ensures reliable starting, but prolongs battery life.
M07B0080
Disconnection and connection
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine, discon-
nect the negative terminal first, then the positive termi-
nal. To reconnect the battery, first connect the positive
terminal and then the negative terminal, before starting
the vehicle.
The condition of the battery is very important for quick
starting and proper functioning of the vehicle’s electrical
system. Check the battery at regular intervals.
To determine the battery charge, check the battery test
indicator on top of the battery.
9
If the test indicator is a blue/ green color when viewed
from above, the battery is OK. A black colored indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
WARNING!
•
Never disconnect the battery while the engine is
running; doing so could damage the vehicle’s
electrical components.
•
•
Ventilate the area when charging or using the
battery in an enclosed space.
Always wear protective clothing and goggles
when working with the battery, or have a skilled
technician do it.
•
•
Never short-circuit the battery; doing so could
cause it to overheat and be damaged.
Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the
battery because the battery may produce an explo-
sion.
•
•
If the battery is to be quick-charged, first discon-
nect the battery cables from the vehicle.
In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to
disconnect the negative(-) terminal first, and re-
connect it last.
•
Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive diluted sul-
furic acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with,
your hands, eyes, clothes, or the coated surface of
your vehicle, thoroughly flush the area with wa-
ter. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and get prompt medical
attention.
•
•
If the electrolyte level is very low, have the battery
checked at an authorized dealer.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 321
NOTE
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
1. Check each battery terminal for corrosion. If necessary,
neutralize corrosion by washing with a solution of bak-
ing soda and water. Apply grease to posts and clamps
after cleaning or tightening.
Good
2. Before cleaning the battery, tighten all filler port caps
to prevent foreign matter from entering the battery.
3. Check to see if the battery is securely installed and
cannot be moved. Also check each terminal for tightness.
4. When the vehicle is to be left unused for a long period
of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where
the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery should be
stored only in a fully charged condition.
M05A0530
The automatic transaxle should be maintained and ser-
viced by an authorized dealer to obtain the best perfor-
mance and maximize life. It is important that the trans-
axle fluid be maintained at the level prescribed.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 MAINTENANCE
To check the fluid level
WARNING!
The fluid level should be checked when the engine
temperature gauge indicates a normal warmed up con-
dition and the fluid in the transaxle is heated to its
normal operating temperature. Operation with an im-
proper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
Transaxle fluid is extremely flammable and poison-
ous. Do not spill fluid when adding or draining.
To add or change the fluid
Procedure for checking the fluid level
1. With the parking brake engaged and the engine idling,
select each gear momentarily, ending with the selector
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
2. The fluid level should be at the HOT mark, but never
above the HOT mark when the engine is at its normal
warmed up condition. Add or drain as necessary to bring
the fluid to this prescribed level.
Drain plug
3. Make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated properly
to prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle.
M05A0460
Use only recommended Mopar ATF+4 automatic trans-
mission fluid to ensure optimum transaxle performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 323
Special additives
DaimlerChrysler does not recommend the addition of
any fluid additives to the transaxle.
rubber hose cover, the hose should be replaced. Deterio-
ration of the hose could cause brake failure.
2. Faulty installation may cause twisting, or wheel, tire
or chassis interference.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
Add oil to maintain the proper level. Refill or change oil
according to the scheduled maintenance table.
BALL JOINT, STEERING LINKAGE SEAL AND
DRIVE SHAFT BOOTS
Check the following parts for damage and grease leak-
age:
Lubricant
Viscosity range
Gear Oil Classification GL-4
SAE75W-90 or 75W-85W
1. Ball joint boots of the front suspension and steering
linkage
DISC BRAKE PADS, REAR DRUM BRAKE
LININGS AND REAR WHEEL CYLINDERS
Proper brakes are essential to safe operation of your
vehicle. Check brake pads and rear brake linings for
wear, and check rear wheel cylinders for leakage.
For proper braking performance, replace brake pads with
original equipment type pads.
2. Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The entire SRS system must be inspected by an autho-
rized dealer 10 years after the vehicle manufacture date
shown on the certification label. [See “SRS servicing” on
page 98.]
9
BRAKE HOSES
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked for:
1. Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If the
casing of the hose is exposed by cracks or abrasions in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 MAINTENANCE
DOOR HINGES, REAR HATCH HINGES, HOOD
LOCK RELEASE MECHANISM AND SAFETY
CATCH
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle interior is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
The door hinges, trunk hinges, hood lock release mecha-
nism and hood safety catch should be inspected, cleaned,
and lubricated as required to maintain ease of operation
and to provide protection against rust and wear. Apply
engine oil to door hinges, hood hinges, and trunk hinges.
Apply Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly to
all sliding contact areas of the hood latch and release
lever. Work lubricant into the hood lock mechanism until
all frictional surfaces are covered.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system; when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent technician inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Also, apply a film of the same lubricant to the pivot
contact areas of the safety catch.
Open seams or loose connections could permit danger-
ous exhaust fumes to seep into the trunk and passenger
compartments.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Do this service when performing underbody service.
Check for any of the following conditions:
1. Check for holes or exhaust gas leakage caused by
corrosion or damage.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide gas found in the vehicle’s exhaust
is poisonous. Inhalation of exhaust fumes can cause
unconsciousness or death.
2. Check the joints and connections for looseness or
exhaust gas leakage.
3. Check the rubber hangers and brackets for damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 325
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Windshield washers
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Periodic cleaning of
the wiper blades is suggested to remove the accumula-
tion of salt and road film. The wiper blade arms and glass
areas should be cleaned with a sponge or cloth and a
mild detergent or non-abrasive cleaner.
If the blades continue to streak or smear, they should be
replaced.
NOTE: Do not operate wipers for long periods on dry
glass; this accelerates deterioration of the rubber and
could scratch the glass.
M31A0730
The windshield washer reservoir is in the engine com-
partment. Check the fluid level at regular intervals and
replenish the fluid if necessary.
9
NOTE: When freezing weather is anticipated flush out
the water in the reservoir by operating the pump. Fill the
reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator anti-
freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out any residual water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 MAINTENANCE
PARKING BRAKE
For vehicles with rear disc brakes:
You should feel the parking brake take hold between 3 to
5 clicks. Also check to see if the lever is properly engaged
with the ratchet, when pulled.
I27A0100
Check the parking brake lever travel occasionally. To
check, pull the lever slowly and count the number of
clicks of the ratchet.
For vehicles with rear drum brakes:
You should feel the parking brake take hold between 5 to
7 clicks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 327
DRIVE BELT (FOR GENERATOR, WATER PUMP,
POWER STEERING PUMP)
Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts and cracks, and
replace it if damaged. When replacing the belt with a new
belt, make sure that there is no interference between the
belt and other engine components.
Then, check the tension of the belt at the designated
point. The deflection must be within specification.
2.4 liter engine
Power steering
pump pulley
Water pump pulley
A/C
pulley
Crank shaft
pulley
M50A0620
Check the tension of the drive belt. The deflection must
be within specifications, when depressed at a point
midway between the pulleys as shown in the illustrations
with a force of about 100 N (22 lb.).
9
M50A0820
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 MAINTENANCE
Amount of belt deflection
TIRES
in (mm)
New belt
WARNING!
Standard value
Used belt
A
B
C
D
.26 to .35
.28 to .33
.17 to .21
Driving with tires that are worn or improperly inflated
can result in a collision, and serious or fatal injury.
(6.7 to 9.0)
(7.2 to 8.4)
(4.4 to 5.3)
.46 to .60
(11.7 to 15.3)
.49 to .56
(12.5 to 14.3)
.34 to .43
(8.8 to 11.0)
Tire inflation pressures
.43 to .56
(11.0 to 14.3)
.46 to .52
(11.7 to 13.3)
.33 to .41
(8.4 to 10.4)
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
.33 to .43
(8.5 to 10.9)
.35 to .40
(9.0 to 10.1)
.24 to .30
(6.2 to 7.6)
1. Safety
WARNING!
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire
failure. Over-inflation results in a tire losing its ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes could
cause tire damage that may result in tire failure.
Do not check or touch the drive belt with the engine
running, or serious injury may result.
2. Economy
TIMING BELT
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in a need
for earlier tire replacement.
The timing belt should be replaced with a new one at the
mileage specified on the scheduled maintenance chart.
Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and
results in higher fuel consumption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 329
3. Ride comfort and vehicle stability
outdoor temperatures. Inflation pressures specified on the
placard are always “cold inflation pressure”.
Proper tire inflation pressures contribute to the excellent
ride quality built into your vehicle. Over-inflation pro-
duces an uncomfortable and jarring ride.
Under-inflation can produce a feeling of sluggish re-
sponse.
Cold inflation pressure can be measured after the vehicle
has been stationary for at least three hours or driven less
than one mile (1.6 km) after being stationary for three
hours.
Cold inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
values molded into the tire sidewall. After driving sev-
eral miles, tire inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) over the cold inflation pressure; do NOT let
air out of the tires to match the specified cold pressure, or
your tires will be underinflated.
Unequal inflation pressures can produce erratic and
unpredictable vehicle response to steering maneuvers.
The proper tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on a
placard attached near the door sill striker on the driver’s
door.
The recommended inflation pressures should be followed
when the specified tires are installed.
Check your tires each time you refuel. If one tire looks
lower than the others, check the tire inflation pressure for
all of them. The following precautions also should be
observed:
Item
Tire size
Front
Rear
Normal tire
P205/ 60R16 91H 32 psi (220 kpa)
P215/ 50R17 90H 32 psi (220 kpa)
9
1. Keep your tires inflated to the pressures that are
recommended. (See the tire and loading information
placard attached on the latch on the driver’s door.)
Compact spare tire T125/ 70D16
60 psi (420 kpa)
The pressures should be checked and adjusted, if neces-
sary, at least once a month.
Tire pressures should be checked more often when weather
temperatures vary widely, because tire pressures vary with
2. Stay within the load limits that are recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 MAINTENANCE
3. Make sure that the weight of your vehicle load is
evenly distributed.
As longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to
irregular tread wear, it is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in the section “Tire rotation” to
achieve full tread life potential in these tires.
4. Drive at safe speeds.
5. After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted,
check the tires for damage and air leaks. Be sure to
replace the rubber caps on the valve stems.
Cuts and punctures in radial ply tires are repairable only
in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult
your tire dealer for radial ply tire repairs.
Radial ply tires
Tire pressure for sustained high-speed driving
For sustained high-speed driving, increase inflation pres-
sure 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended pressure but
do not exceed the maximum cold inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall.
Radial ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard
resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial ply
factory-installed tires on this vehicle are of belted con-
struction and are selected to complement the ride and
handling characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial ply tires have the same load carrying capacity as
bias or bias-belted tires of the same letter size, and use the
same recommended inflation pressures.
Mixing of radial ply tires with bias or bias-belted tires is
not recommended. Combining radial ply and bias or
bias-belted tires on one vehicle will negatively affect
vehicle handling. It is recommended that radial ply tires
should always be used as a set of four.
Oversize tires
The use of tire sizes other than those listed may cause
interference with vehicle components under extremes of
suspension and steering travel, and may result in tire and
vehicle damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 331
Tire maintenance
The following maintenance steps are recommended:
Tread wear indicators
Location of tread wear indicator
1. Check pressure regularly.
2. Maintain wheel balance and front suspension align-
ment.
3. Rotate tires regularly in accordance with the recom-
mendation in the section “Tire rotation” on page 330.
Cargo loads
The load-carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the tire and loading information placard.
DO NOT USE the weight rating data provided on the
safety certification label for determining vehicle passen-
ger and/ or cargo load capacity.
For determining the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, use the specifications provided on the tire and
loading information placard.
Tread wear indicator
M32A0010
Tread wear indicators are built into the original equip-
ment tires on your vehicle to assist you in determining
when your tires have been worn to the point of needing
replacement. Many states have laws making tire replace-
ment mandatory at this point.
9
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as 1/ 2 in (13 mm) wide bands
when tire tread depth becomes 1/ 16 in (1.6 mm).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 MAINTENANCE
When the indicators appear in two or more adjacent
grooves, tire replacement is recommended.
Type 2
NOTE: The mark and the location of the tire wear
indicator are different depending on tire manufacturers.
Tire rotation
Type 1
M40A0490
However, the timing for tire rotation may vary according to
your vehicle condition, road surface conditions and each
individual driver’s driving habits. Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, damage and
wheel alignment. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor-
rect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance
wheel or severe braking. Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the cause of irregular tread wear.
M40A0270
To equalize wear and help extend tire life, DaimlerChrysler
recommends that you rotate your tires approximately every
7, 500 miles (12, 000 km) under normal driving conditions
and every 6,000 miles (9,600km) in severe driving conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 333
The first rotation is the most important to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
Snow tires should be inflated 4 psi (28 kPa) higher than
the inflation pressure shown on the vehicle’s tire placard.
Never inflate over the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall.
CAUTION!
Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.
Snow tires should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/ h).
Tire chains
NOTE: As flange nuts are used on your vehicle, change
to tapered nuts when snow tires (steel wheels) are used.
CAUTION!
Tire chains are not recommended for your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the body is
small, and the body might be damaged.
Snow tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
9
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 MAINTENANCE
REGULAR MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The content and mileage interval can vary depending on
model.
ࣴ 12,000 Miles (19 000 km) or at 12 months
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
ࣴ 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) or at 6 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 335
ࣴ 18,000 Miles (29 000 km) or at 18 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 24,000 Miles (38 000 km) or at 24 months
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
▫
▫
DATE
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 30,000 Miles (48 000 km) or at 30 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
ࣴ 30,000 Miles (48 000 km) or at 30 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Check manual transaxle oil level.
Check coolant hoses (radiator hose, heater hose).
Check fuel hoses condition.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
▫
▫
▫
▫
ࣴ 36,000 Miles (58 000 km) or at 36 months
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and damage.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 337
ࣴ 42,000 Miles (67 000 km) or at 42 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 54,000 Miles (86 000 km) or at 54 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
ࣴ 48,000 Miles (77 000 km) or at 48 months
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear.
▫
▫
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
▫
▫
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
9
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 60,000 Miles (96 000 km) or at 60 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
ࣴ 60,000 Miles (96 000 km) or at 60 months
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
Check fuel system for leak
(tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank
filler tube cap).
Check evaporative emission control system for
leaks and clogging (except evaporative emission
canister).
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
1
Replace timing belt.*
▫
▫
1
* : For California, Massachusetts and Vermont
this maintenance is recommended but not re-
quired.
Change automatic transaxle fluid.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Check manual transaxle oil level.
Check fuel hoses condition.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace ignition cables.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Check distributor cap and rotor.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 339
ࣴ 66,000 Miles (106 000 km) or at 66 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 78,000 Miles (125 000 km) or at 78 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
ࣴ 72,000 Miles (115 000 km) or at 72 months
ࣴ 84,000 Miles (134 000 km) or at 84 months
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear.
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
9
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 90,000 Miles (144 000 km) or at 90 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Check manual transaxle oil level.
Check fuel hoses condition.
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
ࣴ 90,000 Miles (144 000 km) or at 90 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
ࣴ 96,000 Miles (154 000 km) or at 96 months
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and damage.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 341
ࣴ 102,000 Miles (163 000 km) or at 102 months
ࣴ 114,000 Miles (183 000 km) or at 114 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace spark plugs, platinum-tipped type.
▫
▫
▫
▫
2
Replace timing belt.*
2
* : Not required if belt was previously changed.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
DATE
ORDER #
ࣴ 120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 120 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
▫
▫
▫
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
1
ࣴ 108,000 Miles (173 000 km) or at 108 months
Replace timing belt.*
1
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and damage.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
* : For California, Massachusetts and Vermont this
▫
▫
maintenance is recommended but not required.
Change automatic transaxle fluid.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Check manual transaxle oil level.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
9
▫
▫
Check fuel hoses condition.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 120 months
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
ࣴ 120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 120 months
Check fuel system for leak
(tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank
filler tube cap).
Check evaporative emission control system for
leaks and clogging (except evaporative emission
canister).
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace ignition cables.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Check distributor cap and rotor.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
2
Inspect SRS* airbag system.
2
* : Supplemental Restraint System
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 343
SEVERE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The content and mileage interval can vary depending on
model.
ࣴ 9,000 Miles (14 000 km) or at 9 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
ࣴ 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) or at 3 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
DATE
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ࣴ 12,000 Miles (19 000 km) or at 12 months
DATE
ORDER #
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
▫
▫
▫
ࣴ 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) or at 6 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Rotate tires.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
9
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 15,000 Miles (24 000 km) or at 15 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
ࣴ 18,000 Miles (29 000 km) or at 18 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
ࣴ 21,000 Miles (34 000 km) or at 21 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 345
ࣴ 24,000 Miles (38 000 km) or at 24 months
ࣴ 30,000 Miles (48 000 km) or at 30 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Change manual transaxle oil.
Change automatic transaxle fluid.
Check fuel hoses condition.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect suspension system for looseness or dam-
age.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
DATE
ORDER #
ࣴ 27,000 Miles (43 000 km) or at 27 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
9
Check coolant hoses (radiator hose, heater hose).
Inspect suspension system for looseness and damage.
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 30,000 Miles (48 000 km) or at 30 months
ࣴ 36,000 Miles (58 000 km) or at 36 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
ࣴ 33,000 Miles (52 800 km) or at 33 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
ࣴ 39,000 Miles (62 000 km) or at 39 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 347
ࣴ 42,000 Miles (67 000 km) or at 42 months
ࣴ 48,000 Miles (77 000 km) or at 48 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and damage.
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
ࣴ 45,000 Miles (72 000 km) or at 45 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
▫
▫
▫
DATE
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 51,000 Miles (82 000 km) or at 51 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
9
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 54,000 Miles (86 000 km) or at 54 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
ࣴ 60,000 Miles (96 000 km)
Replace air cleaner filter.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
1
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Replace timing belt.*
▫
1
* : For California, Massachusetts and Vermont
this maintenance is recommended but not re-
quired.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Change manual transaxle fluid.
Change automatic transaxle fluid.
Check fuel hoses condition.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
ࣴ 57,000 Miles (91 000 km) or at 57 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
▫
▫
Check coolant hoses (radiator hose, heater hose).
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 349
ࣴ 60,000 Miles (96 000 km) or at 48 months
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
ࣴ 63,000 Miles (100 000 km) or at 63 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and damage.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Check fuel system for leaks
(tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank
filler tube cap).
Check evaporative emission control system (ex-
cept evaporative emission canister).
Replace ignition cables.
Check distributor cap and rotor.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
ࣴ 66,000 Miles (106 000 km) or at 66 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
9
DATE
Rotate tires.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 69,000 Miles (110 000 km) or at 69 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 75,000 Miles (120 000 km) or at 75 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
ࣴ 72,000 Miles (115 000 km) or at 72 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 351
ࣴ 78,000 Miles (125 000 km) or at 78 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
ࣴ 84,000 Miles (134 000 km) or at 84 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
ࣴ 81,000 Miles (130 000 km) or at 81 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
DATE
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
ࣴ 87,000 Miles (139 000 km) or at 87 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
9
DATE
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 90,000 Miles (144 000 km) or at 90 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
Change manual transaxle fluid.
Change automatic transaxle fluid.
Check fuel hoses condition.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
ࣴ 90,000 Miles (144 000 km) or at 90 months
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
ࣴ 93,000 Miles (149 000 km) or at 93 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Check coolant hoses (radiator hose, heater hose).
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 353
ࣴ 96,000 Miles (154 000 km) or at 96 months
ࣴ 102,000 Miles (163 000 km) or at 102 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
Replace spark plugs, platinum-tipped type.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
Check automatic transaxle fluid level.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and
damage.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
▫
DATE
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
DATE
ORDER #
ࣴ 105,000 Miles (168 000 km) or at 105 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
▫
▫
▫
ࣴ 99,000 Miles (158 000 km) or at 99 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
9
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 105,000 Miles (168 000 km) or at 105 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 111,000 Miles (178 000 km) or at 111 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
ࣴ 108,000 Miles (173 000 km) or at 108 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
ࣴ 114,000 Miles (182 000 km) or at 114 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
Inspect suspension system for looseness and dam-
age.
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE 355
ࣴ 117,000 Miles (187 000 km) or at 117 months
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
ࣴ 120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 120 months
Change manual transaxle fluid.
Change automatic transaxle fluid.
Check fuel hoses condition.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
Flush and replace engine coolant.
DATE
Check coolant hoses (radiator hose, heater hose).
Inspect rear drum brake linings and rear wheel
cylinders (except vehicles with disc brakes) for
wear and leaks of all wheels.
Check brake hoses for deterioration or leaks.
Inspect ball joint and steering linkage seals for
grease leaks and damage.
Inspect drive shaft boots for grease leaks and damage.
Check and service exhaust system as required
(connection portion of muffler, muffler pipes and
converter heat shields).
ࣴ 120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 120 months
Replace air cleaner filter.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Replace spark plugs, standard type.
Check drive belts condition (for the generator,
water pump, power steering pump).
▫
▫
1
Replace timing belt.*
▫
1
* : For California, Massachusetts and Vermont
this maintenance is recommended but not re-
quired.
9
Check fuel system for leaks
(tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank
filler tube cap).
▫
1
Inspect SRS* airbag system.
▫
1
* : Supplemental Restraint System.
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 MAINTENANCE
ࣴ 120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 120 months
Check evaporative emission control system (ex-
cept evaporative emission canister).
Replace ignition cables.
Check distributor cap and rotor.
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect disc brake pads, rotors and calipers for
wear and leaks.
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
Rotate tires.
▫
MILEAGE/
MONTHS
DEALERSHIP
NAME/CODE
REPAIR
ORDER #
DATE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Vehicle labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ 1 - Vehicle emission control information label . . 358
▫ 2 - Vehicle identification number plate . . . . . . . 358
▫ 3 - Vehicle information code plate . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ 4 - Air conditioner label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ 5 - Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ 6 - Tire and loading information placard . . . . . 360
▫ 7 - Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Ⅵ Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Ⅵ General vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Ⅵ Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Ⅵ Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Ⅵ Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Ⅵ Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE LABELING
2 -Vehicle identification number plate
This is stamped on the number plate riveted to the left
front corner of the instrument panel pad. It is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Vehicle information code plate
The vehicle information code plate is located on the
bulkhead inside the engine compartment.
4 - Air conditioner label
The air conditioner label is affixed on the inside panel of
the engine hood.
B02D0270
Keep a record of the chassis number and vehicle identi-
fication number as such information will assist the police
if your vehicle is stolen.
1 -Vehicle emission control information label
The vehicle emission control information label is affixed
on the underside panel of the engine hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS 359
5 - Engine serial number
4 Cylinder
6 Cylinder
B02B0540
B02B0550
The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder
block as shown in the illustrations.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 SPECIFICATIONS
6 - Tire and loading information placard
The tire inflation pressure label is located on the inside
sill of the driver’s door.
6
7
B02F0060
BATTERY
B02E0180
BCI Group NO.86
7 - Certification label
The certification label is located on the inside sill of the
driver’s door.
Battery is 12 volts.
NOTE: There are various size of the batteries in the BCI
Group No.86.
When you replace a battery, check the size of the battery
to prevent interfering with other parts in the engine
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS 361
GENERAL VEHICLE DATA
VEHICLE WEIGHTS
Item
2.4 liter
3.0 liter
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheel base
191.9in (4,875mm)
69.9in (1,775mm)
53.9in (1,370mm)
103.7in (2,635mm)
Gross vehicle
weight rating
4,061lb (1,842 kg) 4,227lb (1,917 kg)
2,171lb (985 kg) 2,322lb (1,053 kg)
Gross axle Front
weight
Rear
1,894lb (859 kg)
1,905lb (864 kg)
rating
Seating capacity
5 persons
TIRES AND WHEELS
3.0 liter
GVWR: maximum total weight(load) limit
specified for the vehicle
Item
Type
2.4 liter
LX
LXi
Radial, tubeless
GAWR: maximum weight(load) limit specified for
the front or rear axle.
Tire
P215/ 50R17
90H
Size
P205/ 60R16 91H
seating capacity: the number of maximum
occupants
Spare tire
T125/ 70D16
Type
Size
Steel/ Aluminum*
16x6JJ
Aluminum
17x6 1/ 2JJ
cargo capacity: weight subtracted 68 kilograms
times the designated seating
capacity from the vehicle capacity
weight
Wheel
PCD
Offset
4.5 in. (114.3 mm)
1.81 in. (46 mm)
16x4T
10
Spare wheel
*: optional
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Do not use the gross vehicle weight rating data
provided in the chart or on the safety certification
label for determining vehicle passenger and/or cargo
load capacity.
Use the values provided on the tire and loading
information placard (Refer to the section “Vehicle
labeling”).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS 363
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specifications
4 Cylinder
Engine model
6 Cylinder
2,972dm3 (181.3 CID)
Engine displacement
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement
Bore
2,351dm3 (143.4 CID)
4 in-line
6 - V60 °
86.5 mm (3.41 in)
100 mm (3.94 in)
9.0
91.1 mm (3.58 in)
Stroke
76.0 mm (2.99 in)
Compression ratio
Controlled by-pass thermostat
9.0
88 °C (190 °F)
BKR5E-11
88 °C (190 °F)
Spark plugs
NGK
FR5E1
—
DENSO
K16PR-U11
RC10YC4
CHAMPION
—
Spark plug gap
Firing order
1.0 to 1.1 mm
0.7 to 0.8 mm
(.039 to .043 in )
(.028 to .031 in )
1-3-4-2
1-2-3-4-5-6
Ignition timing idle speed and mixture
Refer to the “Vehicle emission control information” label
under the engine hood.
NOTE
10
1. Your engine is equipped with intake and exhaust valve auto-lash adjusters that require no adjustment.
2. Your vehicle has one of the listed spark plugs. Use any one of the listed spark plugs for replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 SPECIFICATIONS
CAPACITIES
Item
Capacity
Recommended Lubricants
—
Fuel (approximate)
Engine oil
62dm3 (16.3 gal)
4dm3 (4.2 qt)
Oil pan
Engine oils displaying
ILSAC certification symbol
or conforming to the API
classification SL, SL/ CF
Oil filter
0.3dm3 (0.32 qt)
1.2dm3 (1.3 qt)
Power steering
Diamond ATF
Automatic transaxle
4 Cyl.: 7.7dm3 (8.2 qt)
Diamond ATF SPIII
6 Cyl.: 8.4dm3 (8.9 qt)
Manual transaxle
Brakes and clutch
4 Cyl.: 2.2dm3 (2.3 qt)
6 Cyl.: 2.8dm3 (3.0 qt)
Gear oil API classification
GL-4 SAE 75W-85W or
75W-90
As required
As required
As required
Conforming to Brake fluid
DOT3 or DOT4
Transaxle linkage, Parking brake cable mechanism, hood
lock and hook, door latches, seat adjusters
Multipurpose grease NLGI
Grade 2
Door hinges, trunk lid hinges
Engine coolant
Engine oil
4 Cyl.–M/ T: *8.0L (8.5 qt)
–A/ T: *7.9L (8.3 qt)
6 Cyl.–M/ T: *9.2L (9.7 qt)
–A/ T: *9.1L (9.6 qt)
Long Life Antifreeze Coolant
or an equivalent
Refrigerant (air conditioning)
Windshield washers
425g (15 oz)
4 L (4.2 qt)
HFC-134a
—
*: Include 0.65 L (.69 qt.) in reserve tank.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service
Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
For Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Ⅵ Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Ⅵ Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Ⅵ Customer Arbitration Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Ⅵ Department Of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Traction AA, A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Temperature A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE......
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation and its dealers are
vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or
related matter that you may experience. DaimlerChrysler
Motors Corporation dealers have the facilities, factory-
trained technicians, special tools, and the latest informa-
tion to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner. DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation has
empowered its dealers to make warranty and repair
decisions that ensure you are not inconvenienced. There
is no need for you to wait for a decision from the
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation. If a special circum-
stance occurs that requires information from
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation, we have asked the
dealer’s service management to make the contact on your
behalf.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 367
•
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Service
Chrysler Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —Refer to your Warranty Booklet
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation
Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Lago Alberto #320
Mexico 11320, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Any communication to the DaimlerChrysler Motors Cor-
poration Customer Center should include the following
information:
•
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation will not stand be-
hind any service contract that is not Genuine
a
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation has installed spe-
cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States
can communicate with DaimlerChrysler Motors Corpo-
ration by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than a
Genuine DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Service
Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a
Genuine DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Service
Contract, and you require service after your
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation new vehicle lim-
ited warranty expires, please refer to your contract docu-
ments, and contact the person listed in those documents.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your DaimlerChrysler Motors Cor-
poration new vehicle limited warranty expires.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation stands behind only
Genuine DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Service
Contracts. If you purchased a Genuine DaimlerChrysler
Motors Corporation Service Contract, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If
you have any questions about your service contract, call
the DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Service Con-
tract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Warranty
Information Booklet for information on warranty cover-
age and transfer of warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 369
MOPAR PARTS
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and
DaimlerChrysler Corporation.
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from your DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation
dealer. They will help you keep your vehicle operating at
its best.
CUSTOMER ARBITRATION BOARD
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In the 50 United States, and Washington, D.C., if a
warranty dispute has not been resolved to your satisfac-
tion, you may submit the issue to a DaimlerChrysler
Motors Customer Arbitration Board.
Additional information and the address of each Cus-
tomer Arbitration Board is contained in the Customer
Arbitration Board Brochure included in the Glove Box
Kit.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, P.O. Box 8880, Ottawa Postal Station,
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 3J2.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying DaimlerChrysler
Corporation.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
WARNING!
Treadwear
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/ 2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature A, B, C
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperatures can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat build-up and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 INDEX
Accessory boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Accessory (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Air cleaner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Aluminum wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Anti-lock braking system warning light . . . . 105,111
Assist-starting procedures if battery is low . . . . 275
Automatic transaxle indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Automatic transaxle oil temperature
Ball joint, steering linkage seal and drive
shaft boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . 105,112
During cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Brake pad wear alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,326
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Warning sound for brake pad wear . . . . . . . . 170
Brake
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Automatic transaxle
Automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Gear positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Holding on an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Oil temperature warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,164
Selector lever operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Break-in recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Bulb chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,290
Car preparation before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cargo loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 377
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 222
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,219
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,225
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Center console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 105,112
Check engine/ malfunction indicator lamp . 105,113
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Cleaning
Exterior of your car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Interior of your car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,361
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Coolant (engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Cruise control (for non-turbo)
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Defroster (rear window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Dimmer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Disc brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Dome light/ Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Door hinges, rear hatch hinges, hood lock
release mechanism and safety catch . . . . . . . . . 324
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Door-ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,110
Doors
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Driving, alcohol and drugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Driving speed
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,111
Cruise control (for turbo)
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,111
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Customer Arbitration Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Electric rear window defroster switch . . . . . . . . 123
Emission-control system maintenance . . . . . . . . 307
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 INDEX
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Engine coolant level warning light . . . . . . . . . . 105
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . 104,109
Engine hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,363
Fuel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Low-fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,111
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,107,109
Gear positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
General maintenance
Fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Front fog lamp indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fuel
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fuel filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,107
Fuel hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
General vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,212
Handling of Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Hazard warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,110
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Headlights (Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Headlights (Type 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Headlights
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 379
Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Headlight flasher (high/ low beam) . . . . . . . . 119
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
High beam indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,110
High-mounted stoplights
Keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,148
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Lights
Bulb capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Bulb chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Dome light/ Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Low-fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,111
Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Indicator and warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Inside day/ night rearview mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 175
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Instrument panel light dimmer control . . . . . . . 123
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Manual transaxle
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Possible driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Shift points (recommended speed) . . . . . . . . 165
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mirrors
Jack
Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Jacking up the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,369
Key reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 INDEX
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,108
Oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,112
Oil
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operation during cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Operation under adverse driving conditions . . . 259
Overdrive indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Oversize tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radial ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Radiator cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,316,317
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Replacement of light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Safe driving techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Seat belt extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Seat Belts
Adjustable seat belt anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,78
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Maintenance and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Seat belt extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Seat belt reminder/ warning light . . . . . . . . . 105
UNIBELT restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Parking brake
Operating method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parking brake lever stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Proper shift points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Puncture (tire changing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 381
Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Seats
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,114
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Air bag . . 87
Supplemental Restraint System warning light . . 114
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SECURITY indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,105,110
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Severe maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,263,361
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,363
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,106
Starting
At extremely cold ambient temperature . . . . . 151
Flooded engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Normal conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Steering system
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tilt lock lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,106
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Temperature Gage, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 275
Theft protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Theft-alarm
SECURITY indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,105,110
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Timing belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . 199
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tires
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,360,361
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,331
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Size (tire and wheels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 INDEX
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Transaxle
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Vehicle labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Transmission
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Washer fluid level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Washer
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Trip odometer reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Turbocharger boost gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Turn signal indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,110
Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,325
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Wheel covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,325
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Billy Goat Blower QB883, QB883H, QB1103, QB1103H User Manual
Bosch Appliances Range Gas Ranges User Manual
Bostitch Saw BTE300K User Manual
Bowflex Fitness Equipment 552 User Manual
Breville Juicer BJB840 User Manual
Canon Photo Printer P I9900 QSG 1203 User Manual
Carrier Access Network Card Adit 3500 User Manual
Casio Musical Instrument CTK 451 User Manual
Cecilware Water Dispenser NS18A User Manual
Cisco Systems Modem DC 145 User Manual